dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
TRANSCRIPT
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 1/303
DUPRINTER
DP-23S DP-21S DP-21L
Ver.2
SERVICE MANUAL
Be sure to read this manual carefully, so that yourepair and service this machine safely andcorrectly. Do not begin work until you havethoroughly understood the contents of this manual.Repairing or servicing the machine with insufficientknowledge about it could lead to unforeseenaccidents or falls in the machine's performance orquality.
DUPLO SEIKO CORP.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 2/303
1
Introduction
The cause of most accidents is failure to adhere to basic safety rules and observe
safety instructions. It is important to prevent potential causes of accidents from
occurring. In order to do so, read this manual carefully, and be sure to understand
all the safety instructions and correct inspection and servicing procedures that it
provides before beginning repair or servicing work.
Repairing or servicing the machine with insufficient knowledge about it could
lead to unforeseen accidents.
It is not possible to anticipate and describe in a manual such as this every possi-
ble hazard that could arise in the course of repair and servicing. Therefore, besides
observing the safety instructions marked in this manual and on the machine's
labels, service personnel should be safety-conscious and take other safety precau-
tions as necessary. When performing repair or service work not covered by this man-ual, you should obtain safety guidance from an appropriately knowledgeable person.
Copyright 2000
DUPLO SEIKO CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 3/303
2
'Safety-related instructions
'Service work-related instructions
If the instructions accompanying this symbol are ignored and the
machine is operated incorrectly, death or serious injury is likely to
result.
If the instructions accompanying this symbol are ignored and the
machine is operated incorrectly, death or serious injury, or else material
damage, is likely to result.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Examples of pictorial symbols
A " " symbol tells you that a certain action is forbidden. Precisely what
is forbidden is indicated by a picture inside the symbol (in the example
here, the picture means that disassembly is forbidden), or in writing at the
side of the symbol.
A " " symbol means that a certain action is forbidden and/or that a
specific instruction must be followed. The specific instruction is indicated
by a picture inside the symbol (in the example here, the instruction is
"Remove the power plug from the socket").
IMPORTANT:
NOTE:
Draws attention to important information. If this information is ignored
and the machine is operated or serviced incorrectly, the machine`s
performance could drop, or it could break down.
Draws attention to information that is useful for operation or maintenance
of the machine, and to information about its performance, etc.
D Using the service manual
• This manual contains the following information: structure and function of major parts,
disassembly and reassembly procedures, specifications, and procedures for adjustment,
maintenance, inspection and corrective action. This information is current as of December
2000, and applies basically to the model DP-23S/DP-21S/DP-21L DUPRINTER.From time to time, parts are changed to improve quality, performance or safety. Note therefore
that in some cases, certain parts or machine structure aspects described in the text or
illustrations of this manual may not be precisely the same as the product being serviced.
• Safety instructions marked with a " " (WARNINGS and CAUTIONS) are very important for
safety and must be observed.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 4/303
3
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
1. Cautions regarding the installation location
Installation environment
• Avoid installing the machine in places exposed to direct sunlight.
• Sunlight will cause the temperature in the machine's interior to rise, possibly leading to
malfunction of the control system.
• Sunlight could cause misoperation of the sensors.
• The heat of direct sunlight could cause deformation of the machine's plastic parts.* Also avoid installation near to a ground glass window; light and heat penetrate such windows
although they are opaque.
• Avoid installing the machine in places subject to high or low temperature or humidity.
• High or low temperature or humidity could cause the machine to operate abnormally.
Suitable temperature and humidity ranges are:
Ambient temperature: 10y430y
Ambient humidity: 40%470%
Optimum temperature and humidity: 20y, 65%
• If the machine is installed near to faucets, water heaters or humidifiers, or in cool (sunless)parts of a building or in the vicinity of water sources, the paper could absorb moisture and curl,
leading to misfeeds or poor image quality.
• Avoid installing the machine in places with open flames, or where reflected heat or other hot air
currents (from stoves, etc), or cold air currents from coolers, etc will strike it directly.
• Avoid installing the machine in poorly ventilated places.
• Avoid installing the machine in dusty places.
• The machine should not be tilting when it is used.
• Install the machine so that it is level.(The machine should be level to within 5mm in the front-rear direction, and 5mm in the lateral
direction.)
•Do not install the machine on shaky, sloping or otherwise unstable surfaces.
• The machine could fall over on such surfaces, or fall off them, causing injury.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 5/303
4
Safety instructions
• The machine's power supply voltage and power consumption depend on the model. Details of this
are given in the tables below. The power supply voltage and power consumption for the machine
are given in the table below. The machine's power supply voltage is indicated on the identification
plate located on the machine's left side; the machine must be connected to a power supply of the
voltage indicated.
a Otherwise, fire or electric shock could result.
If the power supply voltage is unstable or if the power supply has insufficient capacity, the
machine may not operate normally.
Make sure that the power supply has sufficient capacity for the system as a whole, including
optional equipment.
Warning
Connect to outlet of 120V AC, 60Hz, at least 15A
With no load*
At full load
Power consumption
No more than 130V AC
At least 110V AC
During platemaking : 190W
During printing at speed 3 (printing speed) : 85W
On standby : 15W
Power supply voltage
} Use power supply meeting these requirements
Connect to outlet of 230V AC, 50Hz, at least 8A
With no load*
At full load
Power consumption
No more than 250V AC
At least 210V AC
During platemaking : 190W
During printing at speed 3 (printing speed) : 85W
On standby : 15W
Power supply voltage
} Use power supply meeting these requirements
* 120V AC model
* 230V AC model
* "With no load" - when the machine is on standby.
* "At full load" - when the machine is running at maximum power consumption.
• Use only the power cord that is provided among the accessories.
Insert the power cord plug firmly into the socket, so that proper electrical contact is effected.
• Install the machine close to its power supply. The outlet used should be exclusively for the
machine, and have no other equipment connected to it.
If an extension cord is necessary, it should have a ground terminal, and be of the following ratings:
* For a 120V AC model: 130V, at least 15A, length not exceeding 5m.
* For a 230V AC model: 250V, at least 8A, length not exceeding 5m.
• Never tread on the power cord or pinch it between other objects, or accidents could result.
2. Cautions for installation work
• Install the machine in accordance with the installation procedure appended to this manual.
• Lock the casters after the machine is installed.
a Otherwise, the machine could move or fall over, causing injury.
• To move the machine, push it by its mounting base.
a Pushing the printing (upper) part of the machine could make it fall over.
CAUTION
Using the optional printer stand
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 6/303
5
Safety instructions
' Precautions for safe servicing
• Always remove the power cord plug from the outlet before starting work.
a Otherwise, you could get a shock or your hands/fingers could be injured.
• However, the plug must be left connected to the outlet when performing function checks (of
individual motors, a given series of operations, or electrical circuits). When motors are
operated alone in function checks, interlocks are deactivated, so be aware of the conditions and
positions of related equipment, and take great care not to put your hands or fingers into
moving parts.
• The cutter unit contains hazardous sharp blades. Exercise great care when inspecting the cutterunit or replacing it or its parts.
a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could be injured.
• Do not touch the drum or rollers after turning on the jog switch.
• Do not put your hands or fingers inside the machine while the drum is rotating.
a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could get caught and crushed between the drum and rollers.
'Working clothes
• Wear clothing than enables you to work safely.
Warning
' Tools
• Use tools that are appropriate for the work.
CAUTION
3. Cautions for maintenance, inspection and servicing
• The tape clusters have hazardous blades. Exercise care when inspecting or replacing the
blades.a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could be injured.
If optional tape clusters are used
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 7/303
6
Safety instructions
DLocations of warning stickers
The locations of the machine's warning stickers are shown below. To ensure safe work, read the
stickers and heed their instructions. Keep the stickers clean at all times. If they become damaged
or peel off, replace them with new ones.
No. Parts No. Name Q'ty
q L1-T3060 Warning Sticker 1 1
w L5-T3020 Warning Sticker 2 1
1
e
r
M7-T3030
L1-T3090
Warning Sticker 3
Caution Sticker
1
1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 8/303
7
Chapter 8
Chapter 7
Chapter 6
Chapter 5
Chapter 4
Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting
HELP Mode
Chapter 9Others
Maintenance / Check
Installation
Standard / Adjustment
Mechanism
Description of the Operation
Introduction
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 9/303
9
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
z Features................................................................................12
x Specifications ......................................................................14
c Dimensions ..........................................................................16
v Mechanism...........................................................................17
b Master ...................................................................................18
n Ink..........................................................................................19
m System Setup.......................................................................20
, Part Names and Their Functions........................................21
. Operation Procedures.........................................................29
⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action .............................30
⁄ 1 Option ...................................................................................52
Chapter 2
z Scanner Section.........................................................56
x Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section.............64
c Paper Feed Section....................................................84
v Drum Driving Section................................................97
b Press Section...........................................................103
n Paper Ejection Section............................................106
m Drum Section ...........................................................111
, Option .......................................................................119
Chapter 3
z Exterior .....................................................................122x Scanner Section.......................................................127
c Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section...........135
v Paper Feed Section..................................................144
b Drum Driving Section..............................................148
n Paper Ejection Section............................................150
m Drum Section ...........................................................153
Chapter 4
z Scanner Section.......................................................162
x Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section...........163
c Paper Feed Section..................................................171v Drum Driving Section..............................................176
b Press Section...........................................................178
n Paper Ejection Section............................................180
m Drum Section ...........................................................182
, Electrical System.....................................................186
. Option .......................................................................193
Chapter 5
zDUPRINTER Installation Instructions ....................196
Chapter 7
z Troubleshooting Guide............................................212x Error Display ............................................................228
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions.........298
x Overall Wiring Layout..............................................305
z HELP Mode List .......................................................230
x Overview...................................................................234
c HELP Mode Functions and Operation Procedures.......235
(1)Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes...235
(2)Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions ..............235
• HELP Mode Descriptions .....................................236
Introduction.................................................................................1
Using the service manual ..........................................................2
Safety instructions ...............................................................3
1.Cautions regarding the installation location........................3
2.Cautions for installation work ...............................................43.Cautions for maintenance, inspection and servicing .........5
• Locations of warning stickers................................................6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance......................208
x Cleaning and Oiling.................................................208
c Periodical Maintenance...........................................209
Maintenance / Check
Installation
Standards / Adjustment
HELP Mode
Others
Mechanism
Description of the Operation
Introduction
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 10/303
11
z Features........................................................................12
x Specifications...............................................................14
c Dimensions...................................................................16
vMechanism ...................................................................17
bMaster ...........................................................................18
n Ink..................................................................................19
m System Setup ...............................................................20
, Part Names and Their Functions................................21
1. Machine exteriors ....................................................21
2. Sectional (structural) view of the machine ...........24
3. Control Panel ..........................................................26
. Operation Procedures .................................................29
1. Printing.....................................................................29
⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action......................30
1. Error messages .......................................................30
2. Corrective action .....................................................32
(1) Replacing the Ink Pack ......................................32
(2) Replacing the Master Roll .................................34
(3) Replacing the Master Ejection Core..................37
(4) Supplying Paper ................................................39
(5) Replacing the Drum Unit ..................................43(6) Paper Jam (Feeder side).....................................45
(7) Paper Jam (Ejection side) ..................................46
(8) Master is Not Ejected.........................................49
(9) Master Set Incorrectly
("MASTER SET MISS"is displayed)..................51
⁄1 Option ...........................................................................52
1. DUPRINTER Option.................................................52
(1) TAPE CLUSTER 4.............................................52
1Chapter 1 Introduction
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 11/303
12
chap.1 z Features
Enlargement
Reduction
Enlargement
Reduction
Enlargement
Reduction
Enlargement
Reduction
Enlargement
Reduction
Size A/B models
• Zoom settings (70, 81, 86, 115, 122, 141%)
• Same-size (100%) printing
141% [B5 /B4, A5 / A4]
122% [A4 /B4, A5 /B5]
115% [B5 / A4]
86% [A3 /B4, A4 /B5]
81% [B4 / A4, B5 / A5]
70% [A3 / A4, B4 /B5]
141% [A5 / A4]
122% [A5 /B5]
115% [B5 / A4]
86% [A4 /B5]
81% [B4 / A4]
70% [A3 / A4, B4 /B5]
Inchi size model
• Zoom settings (64, 74, 77, 121, 129, 141%)
• Same-size (100%) printing
141%
129% [ST /LTR]
121%77% [LGL /LTR]
74% [LDG /LGL]
67% [LDG /LTR]
141%
129% [ST /LTR]
121%
77% [LGL /LTR]
74%
67% [LDG /LTR]
141%
129% [ST /LTR]
121%
77% [LGL /LTR]
74% [LDG /LGL]
67% [LDG /LTR]
zFeatures
1. Size B4 printing (DP-23S)
The DP-23S has size B4 (248X355mm) printing area.
The DP-21L has size A4 (210X355mm) printing area.
The DP-21S has size A4 (204X288mm) printing area.
2. High-speed platemaking
With the DP-23S/21S/21L, it takes 25 seconds*1 to
print the first sheet of paper.
*1: Time required to print the first sheet of paper after
the platemaking key is pressed.
3. High print quality
A new, originally-developed superfine thermal head
gives beautifully accurate reproductions of fine print
and halftone photographs.
Its resolution is 300dpi in the main scanning direction and 600dpi in the sub scanning direction.
4. Align paper
Adjusting the eject enables both thin and thick
sheets of paper to be aligned neatly.
5. High-performance lamp
A long-life, high-brightness xenon arc lamp is used
to illuminate the documents. Since the lamp's
intensity is not affected by temperature variation*2,
printing quality at low temperatures is greatlyenhanced*3.
*2: The lamp is filled with xenon gas, which means that it
does not require heat to vaporize mercury, as a
fluorescent lamp does, and therefore its intensity does
not vary with temperature.
*3: Increased viscosity of the ink at low temperatures
results in fa inter print ing than at normal
temperatures.
6. Full range of necessary functions
qDocuments are easily enlarged or reduced.
In addition to same-size printing, there are threeautomatic settings for both enlargement and
reduction. The margin function (94% reduction)
can be used with any setting.
DP-23S
DP-23S
DP-21S
DP-21S
DP-21L
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 12/303
13
chap.1 z Features
7. Options
qTAPE CLUSTER4
This permits sectionized printing, by
inserting tape automatically during
printing.
wKEYCARD COUNTER4
This magnetic card can control the
numbers of prints and platemakings by up
to 200 sections.
NOTE:
Without this optional counter, the number
of sections controlled is 30 (standard).
eDrums
Replacing the drum with optional drums
permits printing with different colors.
rOn-line functions*5
These enable data processed on a personal
computer or word processor to be directly
input and used for platemaking/printing.
*5: This function require PC interface.
wSelf-diagnosis
The machine has a self-diagnosis system,
which notices user by flashing on and off
a message and lighting up the relevant
lamp when a expendable part needs
replacing.
eError message display
An LCD panel displays error messages and
messages prompting replenishment of
consumables.
r2 in 1 Layout mode
This mode makes possible continuous
printing of 2 documents onto single sheets
of paper.
tAdjusting the Printing Position (vertical)
In addit ion to vert ical d irect ion
adjustment.
yKey card counter
Raises the number of sections controlled
to up to 200*4. Versions with internalized
control panel also available.
*4: Standard: 30 sections. Using the counter
(optional) raises the number to 200 sections.
uMemory function
Allows 9 sets of memory settings.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 13/303
14
chap.1 x Specifications
xSpecifications
• Specifications
Product name/model No. DUPRINTER DP-23S DUPRINTER DP-21L DUPRINTER DP-21S
Model Table top model
Platemaking method Thermal digital platemakingPlatemaking interval 25 second(A4, same size)
Resolution 300dpi(Main scanning direction)x600dpi(Sub scanning direction)
Scanning method ADF/movable document
ADF capacity 100 sheets(64g/m2)
Document type
Stencil printing
Document size
Sheets
Document thickness
Max. 291 mm x 423 mm Min. 100 mm x 148 mm
Reading width
64g/m2 to 128g/m2
Printing area
297 mm x 432 mm
Feeding capacity
Max. 250 x 355 mm
Stacking capacity
1300 sheets (64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)
Paper size
900 sheets (64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)
*Cabinet [Option] : 1300 sheets ( 64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)
Max. 297 mm x 432 mmMin. 100 mm x 150 mm
ADF capacity
Max. 210 x 355 mm Max. 204 x 288 mm
Max. 291 mm x 382 mmMin. 100 mm x 150 mm
Paper thickness 53g/m2
to 210g/m2
(45kg to 180kg)Postcard (multifeeder only) 128g/m2
Printing speed 120 pages par minute.(60 to 120 pages par minute, 3 step adjustment)
A, B size modelSame size 100%Fixed zoom ratios 70, 81, 86, 115, 122, 141%Print with border 94%
Inch size model Same size 100%
Fixed zoom ratios 64, 74, 77,Print with border 94%
Printing position adjustment Vertical 15 mmHolizontal 10 mm (Paper with the size of 297 mm x 420 mm or more : 5mm)
Image mode Text mode / Photograph mode / Text and photograph mode
Contrast control Platemaking density 3 step adjustment
Ink supply method Complete automatic control
Color printing Drum unit exchange method
Master feeder Roll master automatic feed
Plate ejection Complete automatic ejection plate rolling method
Plate ejection capacity 50 sheets
Plate ejection method Fan and paper ejection beltLCD panel Light and compact type LCD
Other standard function OK monitorConfidential Safeguard FunctionEntry of different number of prints or setsSpecial functionMemory functions2 in 1 layout mode
Print enlargement/reduction
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 14/303
15
chap.1 x Specifications
• Specifications
• Option specifications
Product name/model No. DUPRINTER DP-23S DUPRINTER DP-21SDUPRINTER DP-21L
Power source
120VAC model120VAC 60Hz, 0.1A
Power consumption 190W(during platemaking), 85W(during 3rd -speed printing),
15W(during standby)
230VAC model 230VAC 50Hz, 0.2A
Size Operational Idle
Operating temperature 10Y430Y
Weigft Machine 68kg
When in use: 1270 (W) 9 673 (D)9 680 (H) mm
When folded away: 680 (W)9673 (D)9680 (H) mm
DUPRINTER DP-23S / DP-21L / DP-21S
Options Drum unit
KEYCARD COUNTER 4(built-in type)TAPE CLUSTER 4
PC interface kit
PC interface kit The printer driver must be installed in the PC.
Compatible with Windows95/98
Macintosh compatibility
(System 7.6.1 or later, MAC OS or later)
I/F board in main unit (on-line set III board unit)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 15/303
16
chap.1 c Dimensions
cDimensions
(mm)
6 1 7
563
4 7 2
1 0 5
3 8 0
1 3 2
4 7 8
7 0 5
5 1 7
229 470
1262
23S0202
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 16/303
17
chap.1 v Mechanism
The machine carries out the processes of “platemaking” and “printing.”
Platemaking
In the “platemaking” process, the old master on the drum is removed while the
thermal head creates the scanned image on the new master and transfers it onto the
drum.
Printing
In the “printing” process, paper separated from the stack by the paper feed roller and
the paper separator unit is pressed against the drum unit by the press roller. There are
small holes over only the image area of the master that is attached to the drum, and ink
that seeps from these holes is transferred to the paper. The paper is then peeled from
the master by the paper stripper finger. The paper is directed onto the paper ejection
belt by a fan unit and discharged from the machine.
vMechanism
Master roll Master ejection box
Drumunit
Thermal head
Drum unit
InkFeeder roller
Paper
Paper sepatator unit
Press roller
Paper stripper finger
Paper ejection belt
Fan unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 17/303
18
chap.1 b Master
1. Characteristics of the master(1) Structure of the thermal master
(2) Functions and materials of the layers
Coated surface … Prevents the film from fusing, being damaged due to friction,being peeled,
and being conveyed defectively due to electric static charge.
Material: silicon fluorine mold lubricantThermal film …… Holes are made by the heat of the thermal head.
Material: Polyethylene terephthalate (polyester)
Adhesive ………… 1] Adheres the film to the base.
2] Does not prevent ink from seeping.
3] Increases impression endurance.
Base ……………… 1] Base material for the master. Fibrous layer
2] Ink seeps the base.
(3) Cross section of the master during platemaking
Holes are made on the coated surface, thermal film and adhesive, while base fiber, base materialfor the master, is left.
A part of the film fused by the thermal head is stuck to the head or banks up.
(4) Printed image
As the image consists of innumerable dots, it is taken as a continuous line through our eye.
IMPORTANT :
•Precautions to be taken in dealing in the master.
(1) Do not put a heavy thing on the box in which masters are packed.
•This may damage the master and may cause defective platemaking.
(2) Do not leave the master as it is after it is taken out.
•Foreign objects are stuck to the master and this may cause defective platemaking.
(3) Keep the master from direct sunlight, too high or low temperature and too high or low humidity.(Desirable storage temperature and humidity: 5-35 °C, 20-80%)
• If the master curls, defective plate attachment may occur.
bMaster
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 18/303
19
chap.1 n Ink
IMPORTANT :
• Precautions to be taken in handling ink
(1) Storage environment
• When an emulsion type ink is stored at too high or low temperature for a long time, oil and water in the
ink pack may be isolated. Keep the ink from too high or low temperature (5°C or less, 35°C or more).
Also keep the ink from direct sunlight since the temperature rises sharply in the direct sunlight.
• When the water content is frozen, the water content is solidified and the bond characteristics decreases.
• When ink is stored at a high temperature, the bond characteristics decreases due to the change of the
surface conditions (surface tension, solubility). The bond characteristics also decreases due to evaporatinof the water content.
(2) Precautions to be taken in handling the ink pack
• When the ink pack is removed from the drum unit to store, put the ink pack with its mouth up, screw
the cap firmly after expelling air from the ink tube. (If air is in the ink pack, water content is generated.)
1. Characteristics of ink(1)Ink type
Ink for the digital printer is an emulsion type.
It has a water-in-oil type structure.
•Emulsion type
(2) 2 characteristics
The surface active agent has 2 characteristics: hydrophilic group and lipophilic group in 1 molecule.
Oil and water bond together by these 2 characteristics as shown in the figure.
(3) Temperature
Ink viscosity is high at a low temperature and it is low at a high temperature. So when ink is used at a
low temperature (10°C or less), the amount of ink transferred to the paper is smaller and the print
darkness is slightly lighter.
When ink is used at a high temperature (30°C or more), the amount of ink transferred to the paper is
larger and the print darkness is slightly darker.
nInk
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 19/303
20
chap.1 m System Setup
mSystem Setup
The machine and its optional equipment are set up as follows:
• DDP system
Documents prepared on a personal computer can be printed on this machine.
The PC interface kit is required to connect this machine to a personal computer.
NOTE :
Duplo Direct Print System KEYCARD COUNTER 4
Drum unit : Option
TAPE CLUSTER 4
Cabinet (Printer stand)
Personal computer
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 20/303
21
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
,Part Names and Their Functions
1. Machine exteriors
Document tray
Document guides ADF
LCD
Control panel
Front cover
Feed tray descendswitch
Feed pressureadjuster lever
Slide guides
Feed tray
Supplementalpaper tray
Power switch
Cabinet(Printer stand)
Caster locks
Document receiving tray(Top cover)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 21/303
22
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
Master coverrelease lever Master cover
Document receiving tray(Top cover)
Master set lever Master roll
Ink pack holder release lever Front cover
Drum handle
Drum unit
Ink pack Drum securing lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 22/303
23
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
Master ejection boxrelease lever
JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)
Print tray
Paper stopper
Paper stacker guides
Master ejection core
Master ejection box
Master ejection boxlid release lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 23/303
24
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
No.
1
2
2A
2B
2C
3
4
5
6
7
8
Scanne
Platemak
Platem
Master
Master c
Paper f
Drum d
Press s
Paper e
Print tra
Drum s
2. Sectional (structural) view of the machine
2
3
2A
1
6
2B
4,8
2C1
6
2B
4,8
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 24/303
26
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
1. Keys outside of the panel cover
3. Control Panel
No. Name Function
q “OK” monitor Flashes to display the content of the trouble and lights to indicated
the part that caused the trouble in the machine.
w “ENLARGEMENT” key Press to set the enlargement ratio.
“100%” key Press to reset the ration to 100%.
“REDUCTION” key Press to set the reduction ratio.
100% lamp Lights when the 100% ratio is selected.
e “DOCUMENT MODE Press to switch between the text mode, text/photograph mode and
photograph mode. Each press of this key moves the position of the lit
lamp that indicates the selected document mode.
Document mode indicator lamps The lamp of the selected mode lights.
r LCD panel Displays the number of printed paper.
Also displays an error message when an error occurs.
t “FUNCTION SWITCH” key Press to toggle between the normal mode and the function select
mode.
“SELECT” key Press to select a function.
y “TEST PRINT” key Press to print only one piece of paper for checking the print darkness
or printed position.
u “PLATEMAKING” key Press to start platemaking.
SWITCH” key
No. Name
i “STOP” key
o “PRINT” key
!0 “ALL CLEAR” key
!1 X = key
!2 Key pad
!3 “CLEAR” key
!4 Printing speed indicator lamp
!5 “PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
!6 “PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
!7 Printing position indicator lamp
STD STD
1: 1
q w e
!4!5!7 !6
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
C
3
6
9
X =
T
y
r
t
!0!1!2!3
LCD panel
a see page 28
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 25/303
28
chap.1 , Part Names and Their Functions
2. LCD Panel
No. Name Function
q Print count Displays the number of prints to be made.
w Sets Displays the number of sets to be printed.
0sht 1set
q w
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 26/303
29
chap.1 . Operation Procedures
.Operation Procedures
1. Printing
Printing speed adjustment / keys
Printing position adjustment / keys
1 Set document
2 Platemaking key
4 Print key
3Input the number of printsand the number of sets
5 End
Function switch keySelect key
Document mode switch key
Test print keyT
Reduction is selected.
Document size is selected.
Photograph mode is selected.
Plate darkness is switched.
Selects Texts, Text/Photograph &Photograph mode.
When the number of prints is input inadvance, printing starts automaticallyafter platemaking.
Printing position is adjusted.
Printing speed is adjusted.
Printing is tested (a sheet of paper.)
Input the number of prints andthe number of sets on the key pad.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 27/303
30
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
1. Error messages
⁄0Error Messages and Corrective Action
The LCD displays a message when the replenishment of consumables or the assistance of
service personnel is required.
Message See page
32
34
37
39
43
44
4
4
Cause and corrective action
There is no ink.
Replace the old ink pack with a new one.
Cause :
Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :
Action:
Cause :
Action:
Cause :Action:
There is no master.
Replace the master roll with a new one.
The master ejection core is full.Replace the core with a new one.
There is no paper in the feed tray.
Load the feed tray with printing paper.
There is no drum.
Install a drum in the machine.
The front cover is open.Close the front cover.
The ADF cover is open.
Close the ADF cover.
The document receiving tray is open.
Close the document receiving tray.
EXCHANGE INK
ROLL - MASTER END
EXCHG. EJECT - CORE
SET PRINT PAPER
DRUM NOT SET
FRONT COVER OPEN
SCANNER OPEN
DOC. TRAY OPEN
A paper jam has occurred on the ejection side.
Inspect the ejection side and remove the jammed paper.
Master roll cover is open.
Close the cover.
The master roll is not set correctly.
Reset is correctly.
PAPER RIGHT JAM
A paper jam has occurred on the ejection side.
Inspect the ejection side and remove the jammed paper.
PAPER LEFT JAM
MAST. COVER OPEN
RESET MAST. ROLL
45
46
4
51
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 28/303
31
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
Message See page
51
228
4
4
4
Cause and corrective action
There is an error during master setting.
Open the top cover and remove the master that isleft in the plate feeder.
The document is jammed on the ADF.
Open the ADF cover and remove the jammed document.
The printer is not ready.
Please wait with the power ON.
Insert the key card into the KEYCARD COUNTER.
4
Cannot print.
This message is displayed if you press (PRINT)
or (TEST PRINT) keys without making a plate
immediately after a master setting error or when the
confidential safeguard function is ON.
4
Printing is not complete.Either press (PRINT) key to resume printing or
press (CLEAR) key to clear the counter.C
T
PLS PLATE MAKING
PRINTING
MASTER SET MISS
MAST. EJECT ERROR
DOCUMENT JAM
PLEASE WAIT
SET KEYCARD
There is an old master on the drum.
Remove all the masters from the drum. 49
•If the message remains after a few minutes, turn the
power OFF and ON again.
•If the message still remains after a few minutes, turn
the power OFF and contact your service person.
•Report the error code and details of error occurrence
to service personnel.
Cause :Action:
Cause :
Action:
Cause :Action:
Cause :Action:
Action:
Cause :Action:
Follow the procedure below.
qRecord the error message "E***".
w Shut off the power and turn it back on.
eIf the message is displayed again, contact service
personnel.
SERVICE CALL( "E***" flashes )
Action:
Cause :Action:
* For displayed messages other than those listed above, refer to Chapter 7
"Troubleshooting". a See page 212
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 29/303
32
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
IMPORTANT :• Only use ink packs designed for this machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the front cover.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Grasp the lever and pull it toward you.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift out the empty ink pack.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Remove the cap from a new ink pack.
IMPORTANT :• Do not leave an ink pack uncapped for longer
than necessary.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2. Corrective action
(1) Replacing the Ink Pack
Master roll Master ejection box
Drumunit
Thermal head
Ink pack
Lever
Ink pack
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 30/303
33
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Insert the ink pack so that the groove on the lip
fits onto the “U” groove of the holder.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Push the ink pack in to the set line on the ink
pack.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the back of the holder in with the palm of
your hand.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the front cover.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Set line
Set line
Front cover
"U" groove of holder
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 31/303
34
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
IMPORTANT :• Only use a master roll designed for use in this machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the document receiving tray.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the master cover release lever.
The master cover will open up.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift out the master roll.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Take out a new master roll from the bag. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(2) Replacing the Master Roll
Document receiving tray
Master coverrelease lever
Master cover
Master roll
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 32/303
35
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Insert the master roll into the machine so that
the green line on the roll is facing the control
panel.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Peel off the seal.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pull out the master, and pass it under the bar.
WARNING
• Do not remove the cover with WarningLabel 1.• You may be injured by the movable cutter
inside the machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Push in the master, aligned with the setline,
until the master's leading edge contacts the
interior surface.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Seal
Green line
Warning label 1Bar
Set line
23S0005
23S0006
23S0003
23S0002
Pay attention to orientation
Master roll
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 33/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 34/303
37
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
IMPORTANT :• Use only a master ejection core designed for use in this machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the master ejection box release lever to
open the master ejection box.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the master ejection box until it stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the cover while pressing and holding the
lid release lever.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Holding the edges of the master ejection core,
pull out the core and discard it.
IMPORTANT :• Ink adheres to the master ejection core. Take
care to prevent ink from getting onto your
clothing.
(3) Replacing the Master Ejection Core
Master ejection box release lever
Master ejection boxlid release lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 35/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
38
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Insert a new master ejection core.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Gently close the master ejection box cover,
pressing it until it locks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it
locks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Master roll Master ejection box
Drum
unitThermal head
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 36/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
39
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the supplemental paper tray if it is closed.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the lever and adjust the side guides to the
paper size.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Load a stack of aligned sheets between thepaper guides and press the stack lightly toward
the machine.
IMPORTANT :• You can load the feed tray with approximately
1,300 sheets of 55gsm high-grade paper.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(4) Supplying Paper
Supplying Paper
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 37/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
40
Changing Paper Selection
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press (STOP) key.Printing stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the feed tray descend switch continuously.
Release the switch when the feed tray is at the
proper height.The feed tray will stop.
IMPORTANT :
• If the sheet is still in the paper feed roller, pull itout and align it with the stack.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Remove paper from the feed tray.The feed tray will automatically descend.
T
Feed tray descend switch
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 38/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
41
If Paper Runs Out During Printing
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
If paper runs out during printing, printing stops and the feed tray is lowered
automatically. aaaaa See page 39
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When the feed tray comes to a syop, reset the paper size.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press (PRINT) key.The feed tray will rise automatically and printing will
resume.
Adding Paper While Printing
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press (STOP) key.Printing stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the feed tray descend switch continuously.
Release the switch when the feed tray reaches
the proper height.The feed tray will stop.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
T
T
Feed tray descend switch
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 39/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
42
IMPORTANT :• If the sheet is still in the feed roller ring, pull it
out and align it with the stack.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Align the stack to be added and place it on top
of the existing stack. Press the stack lightlytoward the machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press (PRINT) key.
The feed tray will rise automatically and printing will
resume.
NOTE :
• When you press (STOP) key, printing
stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 40/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
43
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press and hold the JOG switch until the drum
comes to a stop with a beep.
WARNING
• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.
• Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the front cover toward you.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift the drum securing lever toward you and,holding it there, then pull out the drum handle
straight toward you until it stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the handle on the far end of the drum, and
lift the front end of the drum slightly to pull the
drum toward you.
IMPORTANT :• Do not touch the drum surface. Ink may
transfer to your clothes.• Hold the drum level and place it on a flat,
solid surface.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(5) Replacing the Drum Unit
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
Front cover
Drum securing leverDrum handle
Handle for endof clrum
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 41/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
44
Installing the Drum Unit
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the drum level and place the drum guide
roller onto the rail in the machine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Release the handle at the far end of the drum
and press the drum in about 10cm while lifting
up the front end slightly.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the drum level and press it in gently until it comes to a stop.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift the drum securing lever toward you while
pressing the drum in.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lower the lever.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the front cover.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Roller
Rail
Lever
Lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 42/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
45
If the message "PAPER LEFT JAM" is indicated in the LCD,
check the feeder side and remove the jammed paper by
following the procedure below.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Switch to lower the feed tray slightly.
The feed tray is lowered for the time that the
switch is pressed.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pull out the jammed paper as shown in the
diagram.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press and hold the JOG switch until the drum
comes to a stop with a beep.
WARNING
• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.
• Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(6) Paper Jam (Feeder Side)
PAPER LEFT JAM
Feed tray descend switch
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 43/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
46
If the message "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is indicated in the LCD,
check the ejection side and remove the jammed paper by
following the procedure below.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the master ejection box relase lever to
open the master ejection box.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the master ejection box until it stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Remove the jammed paper.Press the JOG switch to eject the partially printed paper.
WARNING
•Do not touch the drum or rollers when you
operate the JOG switch.•Do not put your hands or fingers inside the
machine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it
locks. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(7) Paper Jam (Ejection Side)
PAPER RIGHT JAM
Master ejection box release lever
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 44/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
47
Paper Adhering to Drum
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the master ejection box relase lever to
open the master ejection box.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the master ejection box until it stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the JOG switch to find the edge of the
paper, then stop the drum at the position shownin the diagram.
WARNING
• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.
• Do not put your hands inside the machinewhile it is operating. Your hands may bepulled in or nipped.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Peel off the edge of the paper from the drum.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Master ejection box release lever
Paper edge
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 45/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
48
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pull the paper toward the ejection side while
pressing the JOG switch to peel the paper off.
IMPORTANT :• Make sure that the peeled paper does not
stick to your clothing.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the JOG switch down until the drum
comes to a stop with a beep.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it
locks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Make another plate.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 46/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
49
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the master ejection box release lever to
open the master ejection box.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the master ejection box until it stops.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press the JOG switch to find the edge of thepaper, then stop the drum at the position shown
in the diagram.
WARNING
•Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.
•Do not put your hands inside the machinewhile it is operating. Your hands may bepulled in or nipped.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift the lever toward you.
The master clump opens and the edge of the master will be
released from the clump. If the master is stuck, release itmanually.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(8) Master is Not Ejected
Master ejection box release lever
Master
Lever
Master clump
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 47/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
50
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Return the lever.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Pull the front end of the master toward you and
press the JOG switch intermittently.Hold the switch down until the master peels off.
IMPORTANT :• Discard the old master, making sure that it
does not touch your clothing.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Hold the JOG switch down until the drum comes to a stop with a beep.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it
locks.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Press (STOP) key.The message is deleted.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Make another plate.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)
JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)
T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 48/303
chap.1 ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action
51
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open the document receiving tray.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Remove the master left in the master feeder.
Set the master roll.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Gently close the document receiving tray.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Check that the error message is deleted.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Make a new plate and start printing.
IMPORTANT :
• The message “PLS PLATE MAKING” is displayed on the LCD panel when (PRINT) keyis pressed without platemaking being carried out.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(9) Master Set Incorrectly("MASTER SET MISS" is displayed)
Document receiving tray
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 49/303
chap.1 ⁄1Option
52
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Open out the tape cluster body.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Remove the old tape core.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Install the new tape. Make sure it will wind off
in the correct direction.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift up the lever and pass the tape through the
slot.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Make about 1cm of tape protrude out of the
slot.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Swing the tape cluster body back in.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
⁄1Option
1. DUPRINTER Option
(1) TAPE CLUSTER 4
23S0031
23S0030
43SH0104
23S0029
Tape cluster body
Lever
Tape
1cm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 50/303
chap.1 ⁄1Option
53
MEMO
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 51/30354
Chapter 2 Description of the Operation
z Scanner Section...........................................................56
1. Description...............................................................56
2. Sequence of Operation ...........................................57
(1) Document detection............................................57
(2) Basic Operation for Feeding Paper to Scanner.58
(3) Operation on Continuous Platemaking ............59
3. Function of Parts and Circuit .................................60
(1) Document Sensors..............................................60
(2) CCD / Lamps ......................................................61
(3) Scanner Stepping Motor / Clutch A, B ..............62
(4) ADF Cover(Scanner Cover)
Open / Close Detection .......................................63
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section...........64
Platemaking / Master Feed Section ........................64
1. Description...............................................................64
2. Sequence of Operation ...........................................65
(1) Operation when the master set
switch is turned on.............................................65
(2) Platemaking / Master Feeding ..........................66
3. Function of Parts ....................................................67
(1) Thermal Head.....................................................67
(2) End Mark Sensor ...............................................70
1. Master Setting Error Detection ......................71
2. Master End Detection......................................71
(3) Master Position Sensor ......................................72
(4) Cutter Unit.........................................................73(5) Master Feed Clutch (Electromagnetic clutch)..74
(6) Document Receiving Tray
Open / Close Detection.......................................75
Master Ejection Section ...........................................76
1. Description...............................................................76
2. Circuit .......................................................................76
3. Function of Parts ....................................................77
(1) Master Ejection Sensor ......................................77
1. Plate Ejection Error Detection........................77
2. Rotation Control of the Roll-up Motor............77
Master Clump opening/Closing Section ................78
1. Description...............................................................78
2. Operation of Master Clump Open / Close Lever ........79
(1) Structure.............................................................79
(2) Plate Attachment / Detachment Operation......80
(3) Clump Opening / ClosingLever Position (A / B / C Mode) .........................81
3. Function of Parts ....................................................82
(1) A / B / C Mode Sensor.........................................82
4. Returning Operation Flowchart
When the Power is Cut Off Accidentally ...............83
c Paper Feed Section......................................................84
1. Description...............................................................84
2. Operation .................................................................85
(1) Rotation of the Paper Feed Roller and
Timing Roller .....................................................85
(2) Paper Feed Roller Drive.....................................86
(3) Driving of the Timing Roller..............................87
(4) Escape the Guide Roller
DP-21S/L ............................................................88
DP-23S................................................................89
(5) Paper Feed Length .............................................90
3. Function of Parts.....................................................91
(1) Printing Position Adjustment Mechanism........91
(2) Signal Lever........................................................93
(3) Feed Tray (Elevator) Upper Limit Sensor ........94(4) Feed Tray (Elevator) Lower Limit Sensor ........95
(5) Paper Sensor.......................................................96
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 52/30355
2v Drum Driving Section ..................................................97
1. Description...............................................................97
2. Function of Parts ....................................................98
(1) Home Position / Jam Detection
Position Sensor ..................................................98
(2) Master Attachment / Detachment
Position Sensor ..................................................99
(3) Jog Switch(Drum Rotator Switch)...................100
(4) Control of the Main Motor ...............................101
1. Rotation Speed Control by Encoder Sensor .102
2. Selecting the Speed........................................102
b Press Section .............................................................103
1. Description.............................................................103
(1) Press Roller Timing & Printing Area..............103
2. Function of Parts ..................................................105
(1) Press Roller (P Roll) Sensor.............................105
n Paper Ejection Section ..............................................106
1. Description.............................................................106
2. Function of Parts ..................................................107
(1) Paper Stripper Finger ......................................107
(2) Jam Sensor ......................................................108
1. Paper Jam Detection Timing ........................109
(3) Paper aligning mechanism ..............................110
m Drum Section .............................................................111
1. Description.............................................................111
2. Circuit .....................................................................112
3. Function of Parts ..................................................113
(1) Ink Detection ....................................................113
1. LED Display and Output Signal on
the Ink Detection PCB Unit..........................114
2. "CHANGE INK" Display Timing..................115
(2) Ink Pump ..........................................................116
(3) Drum Switch.....................................................117
(4) Front Cover Open / Close Detection Switch....118
, Option .........................................................................119
(1) TAPE CLUSTER..............................................119
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 53/30356
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
zScanner Section
1. Description
The machine contains a scanner of the document moving type which scans images while the document isfed.The document is illuminated with the lamps while being transferred, and the reflection in proportion to
the document image darkness is imaged on the CCDs through the mirror and lens. Then the image is
resoluted into picture elements and converted photoelectrically into the level of electricity simultaneously.
The document is fed and carried by a single stepping motor. Two clutches (A and B) are used to engage or
disengage the ADF feed roller and the feed roller.The clutch is turned on only for feeding paper to engage the
scanner stepping motor with the driving system for the ADF feed roller. After the document reaches the feed
roller, clutch A is turned off and clutch B is turned on.The roller follows the movement of the document (fed by
the ejection roller).
23S0203
Document position sensor
Glass
Mirror Mirror Lens
ADF feed roller
Document sensor
Clutch A
ADF paper separator unit
Feed roller
Clutch B
Scanner JAM sensor
Shading plate
Ejection roller
Roller
Lamp
CCDEjection roller Roller
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 54/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 55/30358
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
(2) Basic Operation for Feeding Paper to Scanner
(1) Paper feed 1
When the document is placed on the document
receiving tray, the document sensor is
photointerrupted and detects the presence of the
document. Pressing the PLATEMAKING key
turns on the scanner stepping motor and clutch
A, feeding the document.
(2) Positioning
Clutch A and the stepping motor are turned off
when the document is fed 16mm after the JAM
sensor is photointerrupted. This prevents the
position of the documents from deviating, which
is caused by meandering during paper feeding. If
the front end of the document does not reach the
document sensor within 5 seconds after the JAM
sensor is photointerrupted, DOCUMENT JAM
will be displayed.
(3) Paper feed 2
The scanner stepping motor and clutch B are
turned on again and the document is fed.
(4) Reading the document
After the front end of the document is detected
at the document sensor, the document is fed
several steps, and shading is performed on
approximately 2mm of the front end of thedocument.
Operation
2Paper feed 1
2Reading the document
Document Document sensor
2Positioning
Lamp
Glass
Scanner JAMsensor
Documentposition sensor(Photointerrupting)
23S0204
23S0206
23S0207
Ejection roller
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 56/30359
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
Operation
(1) Paper feed 1 for the second document
If the document sensor is photointerrupted whenthe document has been ejected and platemaking
process is finished at the master feeding section,
it is determined that the next document exists
and the scanner stepping motor, and the clutch A
is turned on to feed the document.
(2) Positioning
When the front end of the document reaches the
document position sensor, the document position
sensor is photointerrupted and detects the front
end of the document, which turns off the scanner
stepping motor and the clutch A to hold.This
method assures stable positioning of the
document.
(3) Reading the document
After the front end of the document is detected
at the document sensor, the document is fed
several steps, and shading is performed on
approximately 2mm of the front end of the
document.
When PLATEMAKING key is
pressed, the print section
detaches the plate and then the
drum moves to the plate
attachment position to open the
master clamp, while ADF remains
held.
IMPORTANT :
(3) Operation on Continuous Platemaking
23S0211
23S0212
23S0213
Document sensor
Documentposition
sensor
2nd document
2nd document
Glass
Lamp
2nd document
1st document
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 57/30360
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
3. Function of Parts and Circuit
(1) Document Sensors
Description
The document sensors detect the five types of document detection.1.Detection of the document
2.Detection of the front end of the document
3.Detection of the rear end of the document
4.Detection of the finish of the document
5.Detection of document jam
Scanner JAM sensor
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN5-41
2
3 -6
Orange -5
5V5V
0
Document sensor
Red
Blue
CN5-11
2
3 -3
Yellow -2
5V5V
0
Document position sensor
Red
Blue
CN4-11
2
3 -3
Yellow -2
5V5V
0
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
Circuit
Operation
Document sensor
Scanner JAM sensor
Document positionsensor
23S0214
23S0319E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 58/30361
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
(2) CCD / Lamp
Description
The lamp illuminates the document and the reflected light is transmitted onto the CCDs.The CCDs output
the image signals in level of voltage.
This machine adopts a xenon lamp which is lit quickly when turned on, and the quantity of light is stable.The
lamp is lit when the the control signal CN1-1 for the lamp inverter unit is LOW (0V) .
The table below shows the specification for the CCD.
Circuit
• Lamp
• CCD
Specification
No. Item Specification
1 Optical signal storage time (SH cycle) 2.048 msec/line
2 Frequency 3.375MHz
3 The number of effective picture elements 3000 picture elements
4Reading width(This is not the image width which can be processed.)
254mm
5 Reading density 11.8 dot/mm(300DPI)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 59/30362
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
23S0325E
(3) Scanner Stepping Motor/Clutch A, B
The rollers for ADF are driven by the scanner stepping motor (PM1) .The paper feed roller is engaged with the
drive system when the scanner clutch (CL1) is turned on.
Scanner stepping motor
Clutch A
Clutch B
Drive PCB Unit
Light green
Pink
Blue
Yellow
-5
-6
-7
-8White -9
Black CN5-4
Brown
Purple
-10
-11
Brown
Light blue
Black
Black
Black
Black
-12
-13
21
21
31
4
3
6
5
Circuit
Operation
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 60/30363
z Scanner Sectionchap.2
When the ADF cover (scanner cover) is closed, the switch’s actuator is pressed down and the switch is OPEN.
When the cover is opened, the actuator is released and the switch is CLOSED.
Description
Opening and closing of the ADF cover (scanner cover) is sensed by a microswitch. If this cover has not
been completely closed, “SCANNER OPEN” will be displayed.
2When the ADF cover is opened2When the ADF cover is closed
ADF cover switch
Main PCB Unit
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
CN3-1
-3
5V
5V0
1
3
Circuit
Operation
(4)ADF Cover (Scanner Cover) Open / Close Detection
ADF cover
Actuator isreleased
ADF cover
23S0292
23S0311E
Actuator ispressed
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 61/30364
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
xPlatemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section
Make the master clump of the drum unit clump the master top end, performing platemaking on the master
with the thermal head. (In this machine, the master on the drum is ejected at the same time when
platemaking is performed.)
The master is conveyed to the drum unit via the platen roller and sponge roller by driving of the stepping
motor, while it is being processed in the head section. Sponge roller is driven through the master feeding
clutch (electromagnetic clutch), and controls the amount of master conveyed to the master clamp section of thedrum unit with the master feeding clutch ON / OFF.
The end mark sensor starts to detect when the end mark (black) section printed on the end of the roll master
is conveyed. "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed on the error display panel. The endmark sensor also detects
whether the master is conveyed properly through the sensor.
Cutter unit
Master feeding clutch Sponge roller
Master position sensor
Master cover switch
Platen roller
Roll master
Thermal head
Stepping motorEnd mark sensor
1. Description
Platemaking / Master Feed Section
Platemaking / Master Feed section
Master Clump Opening /
Closing Section Master Ejection Section
See page 76See page 78
63S00207
23S0273
Drum unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 62/30365
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
2. Sequence of Operation
(1) Operation when the master set switch is turned on
Master
Master set lever
Platen roller
Master position sensor
Photo passing / Photo interrupting
Sponge rollerSwitch ON
23S0217
23S0218
When the master set lever is switched on, the platen
roller and sponge roller rotate and feed out
the document for 10 seconds.
When the master position sensor is interrupted, the
master is fed a few steps and stopped.
HELP mode H-29 \ see p.268
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 63/30366
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Operation
When platemaking operation starts, the drum unit
rotates to perform plate detachment process. The
drum which has finished plate detachment process
stops at the plate attachment position.
Open the master clump.
Sponge roller rotates with the master feeding clutch
ON. A certain amount of the master tip end is fed to
the master clump section and the sponge roller
stops.
Open the master clump
After the master clump is closed and clump the
master tip end, the drum rotates to roll up the
master.
When the master bottom end reaches the top of the
drum, plate attachment is completed. Commence
printing.
Master feeding clutch
Sponge roller
Master tip end
Master clump
Drum
Cutter
*Check the length of the master anddrum rotation angle to control the
drum rotation.
*As the electromagnetic clutch is OFF,
the sponge roller is free.
(2) Platemaking / Master Feeding
63S00211
63S00212
63S00213
63S00214
63S00215
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 64/30367
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
(1)Thermal Head
Description
The thermal elements are in alignment in the scanning direction, and are heated on the image section to
make holes on the master film.
Specifications
Circuit
3. Functions of Parts
Drive PCB unit
CN6-1
-14
Drive PCB unit
CN3-1
-24
T h e r m a l h e a d
No. Item DP-23S/DP-21S/DP-21L
1 Picture element density 300DPI (11.8 dot/mm)
2 Effective memory width 260.2 0.1mm
23S0320
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 65/30368
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Exterior and Lot No.
Lot No.
Lot No. is shown with 4 digits including alphabet. Each digit has the following meanings. Serial No. in
the production month Production month (See the table) Production year
Serial No.
Serial No. in the production month
Production month (See the table)
Production year (Year of decade)
A B C D E F G H I J K L
Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May. Jun. Jul. Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Sign
Month
NOTE :
Lot No.
Model name Lot No.
Label
Thermal resistor line
276.0 0.2
260.16 0.1
Signal connector
Pin (No.1)Pin (No.1)
Power connector
Resistance
23S0221
23S0222
Thermistor
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 66/30369
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
NOTE :
23S0326
Resistance value ( ) H-44
3825 3908 0000
3909 3993 0001
3994 4077 0010
4078 4162 0011
4163 4246 0100
4247 4330 0101
4331 4415 0110
4416 4499 0111
4500 4583 1000
4584 4668 1001
4669 4752 1010
4753 4837 1011
4838 4921 1100
4922 5005 1101
5006 5090 1110
5091 5175 1111
Resistance value
ResistanceResistance value is described on the label. When the head is replaced and the HELP mode is
initialized, set the DIP-SW (H-44) of the HELP mode.
HELP mode H-44 \ see p.280
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 67/303
Main PCB Unit
End mark sensor PCB unit
CN2-4CN1-1
-2
-3 -6
-5
5V5V
5V
VR1
05V
Blue
Light green
Red
Blue
Light green
Red
1
2
3
70
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Reflection light amount
The larger the reflection light amount is, the
smaller the output voltage is. The smaller the light
amount is, the larger the output voltage is.
The value is checked with the HELP 13.
* Adjustment of end mark PCB unit
Adjust the HELP mode H-13 so the difference
between the maximum value of the black level and
the white level becomes a maximum.HELP mode H-13 \ see p.252
HELP mode H-13 \ see p.252
Description
The end marks are located at a fixed distance
relative to the master; as the master is being fed,
the end mark sensor senses master condition and
the end marks by means of intensity of reflected
light.
(2) End Mark Sensor
End mark
End mark sensor
Circuit
23S0219
23S0327E
2Value of the HELP mode H-13
Black level maximum
White level 5 Black level maximum -10
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 68/30371
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
1. Master Setting Error Detection
Operation
In platemaking, the end mark sensor uses amount of reflected light to detect presence or absence of a master
on the transfer path. Then the following displays and operations are performed:
2When a master setting error is detected, "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed and printing is not processed.
2"MASTER SET MISS" is only cleared by opening and closing the top cover.
(It is not cleared by turning the power off.)
2Printing is not performed but platemaking is only performed when the display is cleared after "MASTER
SET MISS" is displayed. (Because the master is not attached to the drum.)
Timing
(1) While platemaking is being processed, the reflection light amount does not turn to be in a white level.
(2) When platemaking process is finished (before printing process), the reflection light amount is in a white
level.
MIN
MAX
HELP 13
Display value
Smaller
Larger
R e f l e c t i o n
l i g h t a m o u n t
White level top limit
Black level maximun 10
Black level top limit
00
63
Timing
When it is considered that the end mark is read under the following conditions, "ROLL-MASTER END" is
displayed.
qWhile the master is rolling up to the drum during platemaking, the following is checked.
wWhen the master passes under the end mark sensor, the amount of reflected light is read.
e If the following conditions are met, it is considered as master end.
Maximum Minimum 10 and Maximum white level top limit
2. Master End Detection
Operation
The end mark is printed on the area about 1 m from the end of the master.
2When the end mark is detected, "ROLL-MASTER END" is displayed.
2When "ROLL-MASTER END" is displayed, plate-making is not performed next.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 69/30372
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Master position sensor
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN2-281
2
3 -30
Green
Red
Blue
Green -29
5V5V
05V Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
5
6
7
(3) Master Position Sensor
Reflection light amount
The larger the reflection light amount is, the
smaller the output voltage is. The smaller the light
amount is, the larger the output voltage is.
The value is checked with the HELP 13.
Description
The master position sensor is located at a fixed
distance relative to the master. By means of reflected light, this sensor senses the presence of
the master on the master travel path, and controls
its attachment position. If the intensity of the
reflected light does not reach the "white" level
(which indicates presence of the master) a single
time during platemaking, "RESET MAST. ROLL" is
displayed.
Circuit
HELP mode H-13 \ see p.252
Master
Master position sensor23S0220
23S0328E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 70/30373
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Description
Completed, the stepping motor for platemaking and the drum stops temporarily, the cutter motor is turned on
to drive the cutter and the master is cut.
C N 1 - 1 - 1
4CN4-5
-6
Cutter motor (M5)Black
Red
Black
Red
1
2
Drive PCB unit
C N 1 - 1 9
- 3 2
Main PCB unit
Circuit
(4) Cutter Unit
23S0322E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 71/30374
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
Operation
1) In the platemaking process, when the drum stops
in the master winding position, the master
feeding clutch comes on, so that sponge roller isdriven and feeds out the master by a fixed
amount.
2) The master clump opens and closes, to clump the
master.
3) When the master is wound onto the drum, the
master feed clutch turns off, leaving sponge
roller free to be turned by the master as it is
wound off the drum.
(5) Master Feeding Clutch(Electromagnetic clutch)
Description
Sponge roller is attached to the bottom section of the master conveyance way of the master feeding unit, and
is driven via the master feeding clutch (CL1) by the platemaking motor. The rotation of sponge roller is
controlled with the master feeding clutch ON / OFF.
C N 1 - 1 - 1
4CN4-3
-4
Master feeding clutch (CL1)
Black
White
Brown
White
Brown
White
1
2
1
2
Drive PCB unit
C N 1 - 1 9
- 3 2
Main PCB unit
24V
Circuit
63S00217
63S00218
63S00219
Master feeding clutch
Sponge roller
Master tip end
Master clump
Drum
B mode
C mode
B mode
23S0323E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 72/303
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
75
When the document receiving tray is closed, the switch is pressed; OPEN.
When the tray is open, the actuator is released; the switch is turned to CLOSE.
Description
Opening and closing of the document receiving tray is detected by the document receiving tray open / close
detection SW (MS3). This machine does not work (except for the master setting SW and the drum rotationSW) unless the tray is closed firmly. The machine stops immediately when the tray is open. (after finishing
platemaking if platemaking is being performed.)If the document receiving tray open is detected."DOC. TRAY
OPEN" is displayed.
2When the document receiving tray is opened
2When the document receiving tray is closed
Document receiving tray open / close switch (MS3)
Main PCB Unit
Pink
Pink
CN2-14
-15
5V
5V0
When the tray is closed : 0V
When the tray open : 5V
Circuit
Operation
(6) Document Receiving Tray (Top Cover) Open / Close Detection
Document receiving tray
(Top cover)
Actuator is pressed
Actuator isreleased
Connector switch
23S0311E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 73/30376
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
When the drum stops at the plate detachment position and the master clump which clumps the master tip
end is opened (C mode), the pulling roller on the rolling section of the master ejection box pulls the master tip
end into the box inside, and the master is rolled up to the core.
If no core is installed, or when the master is fully wound onto the core, the core full switch (MS8) is
mechanically actuated, and the message "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" appears on the operation panel LCD panel.
Drive PCB unit
Main PCB unit
PinkBlue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Pink
Green
Light blue
Brown
Black
Green
Lightblue
Orange
Orange
Gray
Gray
Rollup motor
Jam sensor
photo-receing PCB
Jam sensorphoto-emitting PCB
Master ejection sensor
photo-emitting PCB
Core full switch
Master ejection sensor
photo-receing PCB
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
5
6
CN4-13
CN10-18
-14
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-1
-2
5V5V
5V
1
2
34
-24
-25
5V
12
2. Circuit
1. Description
Master Ejection Section
Pulling roller
Plate detachmentposition
Master ejectionsensor photo-emitting PCB
Masterejection box
Core full switch
Core
Roll up motor
Master ejection sensorphoto-receiving PCB
JAM sensor photo-emitting PCB
23S0264
23S0324E
23S0311
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 74/30377
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
2. Rotation Control of the Roll-up MotorIf the roll-up motor is kept rotating when the master tip end is pulled to the ejection box in the plate
detachment process, the drum is actuated by the master and the stop position slips. To prevent this, the
roll-up motor is stopped when the master is detected by the master ejection sensor. (If the master is not
detected by the master ejection sensor, the Roll-up motor is stopped by the timer.)
(1) Master Ejection Sensor
Description
Photo-emission from the master ejection sensor isreceived on the master ejection sensor, and the
sensor detects with the photo strength whether the
master is pulled to the master ejection box.
Photo-receiving amount is checked with the
HELP5.
1. Master Ejection Error Detection
Operation
While one platemaking is being processed, the difference of photo-receiving amount is less than 8 by checking
with the HELP5, which is determined as an master ejection error. The following display and operation are
shown.
2"MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed on the error display panel and printing is not processed.
2"MAST. EJECT ERROR" is cleared with the ALL CLEAR key , STOP key or by performing
platemaking / printing.
2 A plate ejection error is not detected for one platemaking soon after a plate ejection error or master setting
error is detected.
¡If incorrect sensing occurs due to sensor malfunction, etc., HELP32can be used to
prohibit plate ejection error sensing.
IMPORTANT :
Smaller Larger
Photo-receiving amount
3. Function of Parts
HELP mode H-32 \ see p.271
HELP mode H-05 \ see p.244
HELP mode H-05 \ see p.244
2HELP mode H-05 value
00
63
Timing
If the variation in the amount of light received by
the master ejection sensor during the making of 1
plate is less than a certain level (8 in the HELP5
display value), a plate ejection error is deemed tohave occurred.
2HELP mode H-05 value
Value without master : the photo receiving amount ofthe plate ejection sensor at the position where the firstpaper jam is detected after starting platemaking.
00
Threshold value
63
Threshold value :Value without master + 8
Time
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 75/30378
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
1) When platemaking starts, the drum unit rotates
from the stop position to the opening / closing
lever section (master detachment position) and it
stops temporarily. (B mode)
1. DescriptionThe master clump on the drum unit is opened or closed by the two opening / closing levers' rotation operation.
The opening / closing levers (one for the master attachment position, and the other for the master detachmentposition) are on the master clump opening / closing section on the main body rear side.
The master clump is opened or closed during platemaking. Opening / closing operation is as follows:-
5) Rotate the drum, to wind the master onto it.
4) Open and close the master clump to have it grip
the leading edge of the used master.
3) Close the master clump, rotate the drum again
and stop the drum at the next opening / closing lever section (master attachment position).
2) Open the master clump to have the used master
tip end gripped by the plate ejection unit.
Master Clump Opening / Closing Section
Master clump opening / closing lever(Plate attachment position) Master clump opening /
closing section
23S0265
Drum unit
Master clump opening / closing lever(Plate detachment position)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 76/30379
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
The following is the structure of the master clump opening / closing section viewed with the rear cover opened.
The rotation stop position of the master clump opening / closing lever is determined by the clump motor and
two cams. There are 3 rotation stop positions: A mode, B mode and C mode. Their functions are as follows:-
(1) Structure
2. Operation of Master Clump Open / Close Lever
The drawing below is a section through the machine's interior, viewed from the control side.
Master clump opening / closing lever
Master clump opening / closing section
2A mode 2B mode 2C mode
Clump motor
B mode adjusting cam
Plate attachment position
Drum
Plate detachment position
A / C mode adjusting camB mode sensor
A / C mode sensor
Master clump opening / closing lever
Master clump
23S0266
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 77/30380
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
(2) Plate Attachment / Detachment Operation
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 78/30381
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
(3) Clump Opening / Closing Lever
Position (A / B / C Mode)
Mode Photointerrupter stop position / state of sensor Functions
In the normal state or during printing, the
master clump opening / closing lever turns
out from the master clump opening /
closing lever.A
mode
B
mode
C
mode
The master clump opening / closing lever
pinch the master clump opening / closing
arm.
The master clump is open. This state
occurs when the master is attached or
detached.
B mode sensor(PS4)
B mode sensor(PS4)
B mode sensor(PS4)
A / C mode sensor (PS3)
A / C mode sensor (PS3)
A / C mode sensor (PS3)
Photo-interruptinggPhoto-passing orPhotopassinggPhoto-interrupting
Photo-passing
Photo-interrupting
Photo-interrupting
Photo-passing
Photo-passing
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 79/30382
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
The mode is detected under the following conditions
2A mode
When the B mode sensor (PS4) is photointerrupted, the A / C mode sensor (PS3) detects the edge of
photointerrupting f photopasing.
*With the power ON, the A mode is determined when the B mode sensor is in the photointerrupting state
and the A/C mode sensor is in the photopassing state. If not in the A mode with the power ON, the
master clump opening / closing lever rotates to the B mode and stops. When the lever stops at the
B mode, the drum rotates with the drum rotation switch and returns to the A mode at the stop position.
2B mode
When the A/C mode sensor is photointerrupted, the B mode sensor detects the edge of photointerrupting /
/photopassing or photopassing - photointerrupting.
2C mode
When the B mode sensor is photopassing, the A/C mode sensor detects the edge of photointerrupting f
photopassing.
(1) A / B / C Mode Sensor
B mode sensor(PS4)
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
-91
2
3 -11
Green -10
5V5V
0
A/C mode sensor(PS3)
Red
Blue
CN10-31
2
3 -5
Orange -4
5V5V
0
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
C N 1 - 1 - 1
4
CN4-15
-16
Clump motor (M3)
Black
Brown
Yellow
Orange
2
1
Drive PCB unit
C N 1 - 1 9
- 3 2
Circuit
Operation / Sequence
3. Function of Parts
23S0329E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 80/30383
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2
4. Returning Operation Flowchart When the Power Is Cut Off Accidentally
The machine returns to the initial state automatically when the power is turned off mistakenly during
processing platemaking, plate-detaching and plate-attaching simultaneously or when the power returns after
it is interrupted.
Power ON
Detachment/attachment process
"PLEASE WAIT" display
Attachment/detachmentoperation continues
"MASTER SET MISS"displayed?
Open the document receiving tray
Remove the mis-set master
Close the document receiving tray
Standby
OK monitor lights outInitial desplay
Is the state the sameas the previous state(before the poweris turned OFF)?
Process other thandetachment/attachment
"PLEASE WAIT" lights out
no
Power ON
yes
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 81/30384
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
1. DescriptionFeeding of the paper is performed by the paper separator (employing the center separation method) and paper
feed roller (there is no corner finger). Elevation of the feed tray is powered by the elevator motor. Paper fed by
the paper separator and paper feed roller is fed further by the timing roller and guide roller to the point
where its leading edge is sandwiched between the drum and the press roller. Then the pression of the timing
roller and guide roller is released (by moving the guide roller upward several mm), so that the paper is fed
through at a speed equal to the circumferential speed of the drum and press roller. The press roller sensor
senses the paper feed condition; if a feed error occurs, the message “PAPER LEFT JAM” is displayed. For
details, see “1.Paper Jam Detection Timing” in chapter 2 (n Paper ejection section). \See page 109
cPaper feed section
Paper
Drum
23S0274
Paper separator
Paper feed roller
Elevator motor
Feed traySupplemental paper tray
Timing roller
Press roller
Guide roller
P roll sensorLPU(Long Paper Unit)
DP-23S
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 82/303
Paper feed roller
Timing roller
Paper feed segment
Timing segment
Pinion gear
Paper feed roller
85
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
When the main motor turns, the paper feed cam rotates, causing the paper feed segment and timing segment
to execute the reciprocating motion shown below, which turns the pinion gear.
2. Operation
(1) Rotation of the Paper Feed Roller and
Timing Roller
23S0223
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 83/30386
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
The paper feed roller is driven by the main motor via the timing belt and the paper feed clutch. The rotational
timing depends on the ON/OFF state of the paper feed clutch and is controlled by the program.
(2) Paper Feed Roller Drive
Paper feed roller
Main motorPaper feed clutch
Timing roller
23S0279
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 84/30387
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
Timing roller is actuated to rotate by the pinion gear and spring clutch. When the paper feed cam rotates, the
reciprocating motion of the timing roller segment is transmitted to the pinion gear, and the spring clutch
works to rotate the Timing roller in the direction of conveyance.
(3) Driving of the Timing Roller
Timing roller
Paper feed cam
Spring clutch
Spring clutch
Pinion gear
Paper feed segment
23S0275
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 85/30388
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
23S0286
23S0287
After the Press roller is pressed to the drum, the printing paper is gripped firmly with the drum and Press
roller, the Guide roller is released from the Timing roller. This is called "escaped". Escape timing is within a
period when the printing paper is conveyed about 10 mm after it is gripped with the drum and Press roller.
(4) Escape the Guide Roller
¡When the timing is too late, the printing paper is gripped at two places too long. Thus
master elongation and slippage occur.
¡On the contrary, when the timing is too early, the printing paper is not gripped at all, and it
is not well settled. Thus creasing of paper and dispersion of the printing position occurs.
IMPORTANT :
Escape cam
Escape cam
Timing roller
Timing roller
Escape lever
Guide roller
Press roller
Guide roller
Drum
Paper
DP-21S/L
Drum
Press roller
about10mm
about
10mm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 86/303
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
89
23S0289
23S0290
After the Press roller is pressed to the drum, the printing paper is gripped firmly with the drum and Press
roller, the Guide roller is released from the Timing roller. This is called "escaped". Escape timing is within a
period when the printing paper is conveyed about 10 mm after it is gripped with the drum and Press roller.
(4) Escape the Guide Roller
¡When the timing is too late, the printing paper is gripped at two places too long. Thus
master elongation and slippage occur.
¡On the contrary, when the timing is too early, the printing paper is not gripped at all, and it
is not well settled. Thus creasing of paper and dispersion of the printing position occurs.
IMPORTANT :
Escape cam
Escape cam
Timing roller
Timing roller
Escape lever
Guide
roller
Press roller
Guide roller
Drum
Paper
DP-23S
Drum
Press roller
about10mm
about
10mm
Escape motor
Escape sensor
Sensor plate
Escape motor
* DP-21S / 21L : Option
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 87/30390
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
The “paper feed length” is the length by which the paper feed roller feeds out the print paper. When the paper
feed roller feeds out the print paper, the guide roller is pressed against the timing roller and does not rotate;
as a result, the paper arches up between the paper separator and the timing roller, since the distance between
these two items is only 80mm, while the length by which the paper is fed out from the paper feed roller is
95mm. This arching has the effect of correcting any skewing of the paper (as the leading edge is held firm
between the guide and timing rollers). It also has the effect of lessening the load on the timing roller when it
feeds the paper through, thus minimizing slippage.
For feed amount, the leading edge of the paper is detected by the loop sensor and paper feed is controlled by
program.
¡If paper feed length is too large: the arching dimension will be too large, and if the paper is
of a very stiff type, it will buckle up between the paper feed roller and the paper feed inlet
(upper), causing a PAPER JAM error ("PAPER LEFT JAM").
¡If paper feed length is too small: the arching dimension will be too small, so that arching
will be unable to correct skewing of the paper, and skewing and wrinkling will be liable tooccur. Furthermore, the slippage that occurs when the timing roller feeds the paper
through will be very large, resulting in printing position errors.
IMPORTANT :
(5) Paper Feed Length
Cam follower
Paper feed cam
Paper feed roller
Paper
Guide roller
Paper feed sensor
Paper separator
Timing roller
23S0260
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 88/30391
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
The printing position is adjusted by changing the
timing of the paper toward the drum with the
PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT , key
on the control panel.
Description
When the PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
, key on the control panel is pressed, the link
cam is driven by the motor. As the link cam moves,
the cam follower position (bearing) from the paper
feed cam changes. Accordingly drive timing for the
timing roller can be changed.
2Press the key ;
Cam follower moves in the direction of : e Drive timing of the timing roller becomes earlier.
Paper timing becomes earlier, and the picture image moves backward.
2Press the key ;
Cam follower moves in the direction of : b Drive timing of the timing roller becomes later.
Paper timing becomes later, and the picture image moves forward.
(1) Printing Position Adjusting Mechanism
¡Pressing makes cam follow-
er move in the b direction
¡Pressing makes cam follow-
er move in the e direction
Timing roller
Link cam
Printing position motor
Standard position sensor
Paper feed cam
Top and bottomlimit sensor
Cam follower
23S0258
3. Functions of parts
STD
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 89/30392
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
Standard position sensor(PS11)
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
-2912
3 -31
White -30
5V5V
0
Top and bottom limit sensor(PS10)
Red
Blue
CN10-261
2
3 -28
Gray -27
5V5V
0
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
5V Photo passing:0V
Photointerrupting:5V
C N 1 - 1 - 1
4
CN4-1
-2
Printing position motor (M6)
Black
Brown
Orange
Yellow
2
1
Drive PCB unit
C N 1 - 1 9
- 3 2
Circuit
Operation
Top and bottom limit of print position is detected by the top and bottom limit sensor and the standard position
sensor.
The center position is detected by the standard position sensor.
2 photopassing, photointerrupting
The printing position is between the standard position and bottom limit.
2 photopassing, the edge of photointerrupting - photopassing
is detected
The printing position is at the bottom limit.
2 photointerrupting, photointerrupting
The printing position is between the standard position and the top limit.
2 photointerrupting, the edge of photointerrupting - photopassing
is detected
The printing position is at the top limit.
Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:
Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:
Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:
Limit sensor:Standard sensor:
Operation with the Power ON
The printing position returns to the standard
position by operating with the power ON,
depending on the sensor state as follows.
2When positioned between the standard position
and the bottom limit:
Rotate the printing position motor normally (CW)
to return the printing position to the standard.
2When positioned between the standard position
and the top limit:
Rotate the printing position motor reversely
(CCW) to return the printing position to the stan-
dard.
23S0330E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 90/30393
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
Description
Operation
View from
Pinch leverDrum
P roll sensor
Press roller
Timing roller
Guide roller
Signal lever
(2) Signal Lever
The signal lever is positioned at the back of the Guide roller / Timing roller. Whether the paper is fed by the
Timing roller is detected mechanically.
The pinch lever is attached to the other end of the shaft to which the signal lever is attached. As the signal
lever is jumped by the paper, the pinch lever also jumps. Accordingly the Press roller is out of control and
rises. The above operation keeps the drum from dirts as the Press roller is in contact with the drum when the
paper is not fed. As the Press roller sensor detects rising of the Press roller, Whether the paper is fed from the
paper feed section to the printing section normally is detected indirectly.
Paper
Signal lever
Press roller
P roll sensor
Timing roller
Guide roller
Press leverPinch lever
A
23S0277
23S0257
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 91/30394
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
(3) Feed Tray (Elevator) Upper Limit Sensor
Description
Circuits
Operation
The feed tray (elevator) upper limit sensor senses decrease of the paper pile, and the upper limit position of
the feed tray. It does so by detecting the up/down motion of the paper feed shaft.
Sensing of feed tray upper limit
2When the feed tray rises, the paper in it presses the paper feed roller upward, making the paper feed shaft
lever (photointerrupter) rotate upwards about its fulcrum, until it no longer obstructs the sensor’s light
beam. Restoration of the sensor’s light beam signals that the paper tray has reached the upper limit, and
triggers stopping of the feed tray’s rise.
Sensing of paper decrease
2 As printing progresses and the paper decreases, the paper feed roller gradually descends, until it obstructs
the sensor’s light beam. When this happens, the feed tray is raised until the light beam is restored.
If the light beam is not restored within about 30 seconds of the sending of the RAISE FEED TRAY
command, error E002 (elevator lock) is displayed.
Feed tray (elevator) upper limit sensor
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN2-221
2
3 -24
Light green -23
5V5V
05V Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
23S0301E
23S0224
Paper feed roller
Paper tray upper limit sensor
Paper
Fulcrum
Paper feed shaft lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 92/30395
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
(4) Feed Tray (Elevator) Lower Limit Switch
Description
Circuits
Operation
This is a micro switch (SM6) that senses the lower limit position of the feed tray.
When the feed tray rises, the bracket disengages from the switch and the switch closes. When the feed tray
descends to its lower limit position, the bracket engages the switch’s actuator, opening the switch.
If the switch does not open within about 30 seconds of the sending of the LOWER FEED TRAY command, error
E002 (elevator lock) is displayed.
Feed tray (elevator) lower limit switch
Lower limit (PUSH) : OPEN
Main PCB Unit
Light blue
Light blue
CN2-20
-21
5V
5V0
23S0302E
Bracket
Actuator
23S0114
Feed tray lowerlimit switch
2
Lower limit position
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 93/30396
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2
(5) Paper Sensor
Description
Circuits
Operation
Senses presence/absence of paper in the feed tray. When the paper in the tray runs out, the message "SET
PRINT PAPER" is displayed and printing stops.
When there is no paper, the lever moves away and the sensor opens. When paper is placed inside, the lever
presses the actuator and the sensor closes. When an absence of paper is detected, the message "SET PRINT
PAPER" is displayed on the operation panel.
2When absence of paper is sensed, platemaking, printing and test printing are not possible.
2If the paper runs out during printing, "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed on the operation panel, printing is
stopped, and the feed tray descends to its lower limit position.
2If the paper runs out during platemaking, operation continues until the end of the platemaking process,
then operation stops (without proceeding to the printing process), and the feed tray descends to its lower
limit position.
Paper sensor
Closed when paper present
Open when paper absent
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN2-251
2
3 -27
Purple -26
5V5V
05V Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
¡When there is no paper :
23S0226
23S0303E
Photointerrupting
Photopassing
Actuator
Paper sensor
¡When there is paper placed :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 94/30397
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
vDrum Driving Section
1. Description
Encoder sensor
Encoder
Main motor
Drum gear
Drum home / jam detectionposition sensor
(P roll sensor)
23S0248
Master attachment / detachment position sensor
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 95/30398
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
(1) Home Position / Jam Detection
Position Sensor
2. Function of Parts
The home position / jam detection position sensor detects the drum home position and jam detection position.
2The drum home position is the position where the drum stops at the same time when a beep sounds after
the jog switch (drum rotator switch) is kept pressing.
2The jam detection position is the timing to check paper jamming in the paper ejection section.
2Paper jamming in the paper ejection section is checked in the above timing with the jam sensor (photo-
receiving) and P roll sensor.
Operation
The home position / jam detection position sensor is positioned while the drum is rotating as follows:-
2The home position is detected with the edge of photointerrupting / photopassing.
2The jam detection position is detected with the edge of photopassing / photointerrupting.
Drum home position /
jam detection position sensor (PS5)
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN10-61
2
3 -8
Yellow -7
5V5V
05V Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
Circuit
23S0249
23S0304E
Drum home/jam detectionposition sensor
Drum home/jam detectionposition edge
Jam detection position edge
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 96/30399
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
(2) Master Attachment / Detachment
Position Sensor
The master attachment / detachment position sensor detects the drum stop position when the plate is
attached or detached. It also detects the speed reducing timing for stopping at the printing speed and for
pressing the JOG switch (drum rotator switch).
Operation
The following is the state of the master attachment / detachment position sensor while the drum is rotating.
2The master detachment position is detected with the edge of photopassing f photointerrupting.
2The master attachment position is detected with the edge of photointerrupting f potopassing.
2The drum speed is reduced to the slow (before-stop) speed at the plate detachment position before the drum
stops.
Master attachment / detachment
position sensor (PS6)
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN10-121
2
3 -14
Purple -13
5V5V
05V Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
Circuit
23S0305E
23S0250
Master detachment position
Master attachment position
Master detachmentposition edge
Master attachmentposition edge
Master attachment / detachment position sensor
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 97/303100
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
Description
The drum rotates as long as the JOG switch (drum rotator switch) is pressed (within one rotation) and stops
at the stop position with a beep.
In the normal state, the drum rotates (within one
rotation) when the JOG switch (drum rotator
switch) is kept pressed and the drum stops at the
stop position, reducing the speed to the slow
(before-stop) speed at the first plate detachment
position.
When the P roll sensor is in the photopassing
state (P roll ON) at the first plate detachment
position, the drum passes the stop position
without reducing the speed.
JOG switch (drum rotator switch) (SW3)
Main PCB Unit
Purple
Purple
CN2-8
-9
5V
5V0
Circuit
(3) JOG Switch (Drum Rotator Switch)
JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)
JOG switch (drum rotator switch) (SW3)
23S0014
23S0306E
2When the JOG Switch (Drum Rotator Switch) Is
Pressed Down
Sequence of Operation
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 98/303101
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
(4) Control of the Main Motor
Encoder sensor (PS7)
DC24V
Main motor (M1)
Main motor PCB Unit
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
Red
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Blue
CN1-1
CN4-1
-2
-3
-4
CN5-1
-2
1
2
3 -3
Gray -2
5V5V
05V
Photopass : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
M a i n 4
M a i n 3
M a i n 2
M a i n 1
I n t e r l o c k m o n i t o r
E n c o d e r d i v i d i n g
5 V
G N D
C N 3 - 1
C N 1 1 - 2 1
- 2 2
- 2 3
- 2 4
- 2 5
- 2 6
- 2 7
- 2 8
- 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8
B l u
e
R e d O r a
n g e
W h i t e
B l a c k
G r a
y
L i g h t b l u e
P u r
p l e
Circuit
23S0307E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 99/303102
v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2
1. Rotation Speed Control by Encoder Sensor
The encoder sensor detects the main motor
rotation. The main motor PCB Unit controls the
number of main motor rotations with the encoder
sensor signal. The encoder sensor signal is
transmitted to the main PCB Unit as encoderdividing signal (8 dividings). The number of main
motor rotations is checked with the HELP01.
2. Selecting the Speed
The speed is selected with the main 1 - 4 on the main PCB Unit.
The following are the speed depending on the pin state.
Slow 2 is applied to accelerating only. it is not used to reduce the speed. All the speeds
including slow 1 are accelerating speeds. if the slow 1 is not operated, all the other speeds
are not operated.
IMPORTANT :
CN 11-25 Main 1
H
SLOW 1 SLOW 2 JOG1st
SPEED2nd
SPEED3rd
SPEEDSTOP
-26 Main 2
-27 Main 3
-28 Main 4
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
HELP mode H-01 \ see p.238
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 100/303103
b Press Sectionchap.2
bPress Section
1. Description
(1) Press Roller Timing & Printing Area
DescriptionIn this machine, the master is rolled up to the
drum, ink is transferred to the drum and the
printing paper is pressed to the drum by the press
roller to print.
Printing is performed on only the sections that
meet the following requirements.
1) The sections of the master on which holes are
made by processing platemaking. (platemaking area)
2) The hole sections of the drum.3) The section of the drum pressed with the press
roller. (the area pressed ON)
When the pressed-on position is 0 under the
normally adjusted conditions, relations among
1), 2) and 3) are as follows*-
Drum gear
Press roller
Press lever
P roll sensor
(mm)
DP-23S DP-21L DP-21S
360 356
315.3365.3
355 300
Press ON length
Drum hole section length
Printing area length
23S0251
DP-21L/23S : 365.3mmDP21S : 315.3mm
D P - 2 1 L / 2 3 S : 2 5 0 m m
D P 2 1 S : 2 1 0 m m
Center of themaster clump shaft
Bottom end of thehole section
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 101/303104
b Press Sectionchap.2
The press roller is ON (the press roller is pressed to the drum) or OFF by operating the press lever up and
down with the cam inside the drum gear.
Press roller : OFF Press roller : ON
Do not press off later than the hole
section end position since ink
seeps from the bottom end of the
master.
IMPORTANT :
Adjusting the printing area means that the cam
curve goes up and down as shown in the figure. The
timing of drum ON / OFF varies depending on the
cam curve`s up and down. The ON position is before
the drum hole section, so the printing area is not
influenced. (Do not shorten the printing area length
as it is influenced.) The OFF position is onlychanged and the printing area is adjusted.
Drum
Drum gear
Cam
Press roller
Press lever
Drum
Drum gear
Cam
Press rollerPress lever
23S0252
Press OFF position Press ON position
Drum hole sectionend
Drum hole sectionstart
Printingarea
Printing area
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 102/303105
b Press Sectionchap.2
(1) Press Roller (P Roll) Sensor
The P roll sensor detects up and down of the press roller.
The press roller only ascends when the paper is fed from the paper feed section by the pinch lever. The P roll
sensor also is used to know whether the paper is fed.
Operation
The P roll sensor position varies depending on the press roller position as follows:-
• When the press roller is OFF (DOWN) : photointerrupting
• When the press roller is ON (UP) : photopassing
Press roller : OFF Press roller : ON
Press roll limit sensor(PS8)
Main PCB Unit
Red
Blue
CN10-151
2
3 -17
Light blue -16
5V5V
05V Photopassing : 0V
Photointerrupting : 5V
Circuit
2. Function of Parts
Drum Drum
Press roller
Press lever
Press roller
Press lever
Pinch leverPinch lever
P roll sensor:photopassing
P roll sensor:photointerru
pting
23S0253
23S0308E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 103/303106
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2
nPaper Ejection Section
1. Description
In the paper ejection section the printed paper is removed from the drum and is ejected to the print tray.
Drum
Main motor
Paper stripper finger
Paper ejection clutch
Paper ejection belt
Paper ejection fun
23S00288
Drum
Main motor
Paper stripper finger
Paper ejection belt
Paper ejection fun
DP-23S
DP-21S/L
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 104/303107
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2
2. Functions of Parts
Mechanical Structure and Operation
In addition to the paper stripper finger installed in the center, there are two sub paper remover fingers on
both sides. There is an air diffuser on the tip of the finger. Compressed air transmitted from the air pump is
blowed out of this hole to detach the tip end of the paper from the drum.
To remove the paper from the drum firmly, the gap between the tip of finger and the drum surface and
between the tip of finger and the corner of the master clump are adjusted as follows:-
Air pump
Sub paperstripper fingerPaper
stripper fingerSub paperstripper finger
Drumsurface
Approx0.5mm
Paper stripperfinger
(1) Paper Stripper Finger
23S0247
23S0278
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 105/303108
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2
Description
The jam sensor photo-receiving element is installed on the paper ejection fan unit and detects whether the
paper is ejected normally. When it is detected that the paper is not ejected normally, "PAPER RIGHT JAM"
(ejection side) is displayed on the error display panel on the control panel.
Operation
The Jam photo-emitting PCB is installed in the master ejection box, and the photo-receiving PCB in the paper
ejection fan unit. HIGH with the optical path interrupted. LOW with the optical path passing.
There are two cases of interruption; interrupted by the paper and the master ejection box is open.
Master ejection sensor
photo-emitting PCB
Jam sensor
photo-emitting PCB
Blue
Jam sensor
photo-recieving PCBCN10-18
-19
-25
-24
-23
Main PCB Unit
Blue
Blue
Gray
Pink
Pink
CN10-225
1
2
1
2
2
1
4
5V
5V
5V
3
6
Circuit
(2) Jam Sensor
23S0309E
23S0255
Paper ejection fun unit
Master ejection box
Jam sensor(Photo-emitting)
Jam sensor(Photo-receiving)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 106/303109
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2
2Paper jamming on the ejection side
JAM1: The bottom end of the paper is not ejected.
When the jam sensor (light-emitting and light-receiving) is interrupted at the timing of jam detection
position edge (photopassing \ photointerrupting) of the drum home / jam detection position sensor
PS5.
JAM2: The tip end of the paper is not ejected.
When the JAM sensor is not interrupted at all while the P roll sensor is in the state of photopassing
(pressed ON).
JAM (stop): When the JAM sensor is interrupted as the master ejection box is open when the machine stops.
The display is cleared when the sensor is in the state of photopassing.
2Paper jamming on the feeder side
JAM3: The paper does not pass the signal lever though the paper is fed. The P roll sensor is not in the state
of photopassing when the drum rotates twice after the paper feed solenoid is ordered ON.
1. Paper Jam Detection Timing
Description
Paper jamming is divided into two types: "PAPER RIGHT JAM" (ejection side) and "PAPER LEFT JAM"(feeder
side). Paper jamming is detected under the following conditions. When paper jamming is detected, "PAPER
JAM" is displayed on the error display panel on the control panel, and the machine stops printing operation.
The display is cleared by removing the cause of paper jam and pressing the STOP key or by restarting
printing.
Sequence of Operation
A4 LG B4 A4 LG B4 A4 LG B4
23S0256
Jam sensor(Photo-emitting)
Signal lever
P roll sensor
Master attachment/detachmentposition sensor
Jam sensor(Photo-receiving)
Drum home/jam detection position sensor
DP-23S
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 107/303110
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2
(3) Paper aligning mechanism
Description
Paper can be aligned neatly by considering the ejection angle.
Adjustments should be made in accordance with paper thickness.
For thinner paper: Set the lever in the upper position.
For thicker paper: Set the lever in the lower position.
* Although the lever is usually set at the intermediate position for paper of normal thickness (65g/m 2), the
lever position should be adjusted depending on the condition of the paper.
Lever
Thinner paper
Ticker paper
23S0285
Normal(65g/ )
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 108/303111
m Drum Sectionchap.2
mDrum Section
The ink control section is in the drum unit. The ink control section is supplied with ink in the ink pack
attached to the drum unit by the motor. The ink control section has an ink detection function, and is always
supplied with a fixed amount of ink. Printing darkness is adjusted by changing the gap between the squeegee
roller and the ink roller. Five color inks are available: black, red, blue, green and brown. Perform color
printing to replace the drum unit for each color. (Press the drum rotation switch to the drum home position to
replace the drum unit.)
In this machine, whether there is a drum or not is detected. If the drum is not attached properly, it is taken as
"DRUM NOT SET", and "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed on the control panel.
Ink detection PCB unit
Ink motor
Ink pack
Squeegee roller
Ink roller
1. Description
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 109/303112
m Drum Sectionchap.2
23V
23V
Drive PCB Unit
Orange
Pink
Blue
Brown
Black
Orange
Pink
Blue
Brown
Black
Brown
Black
Blue
Brown
Black
CN2-1
CN1-3
-1
-2
-2
-3
-4
-5
2
8
3
9
4
3
1
2
1
2
Ink detection PCB Unit
Ink motor (M7)
2. Circuit
23S0310E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 110/303113
m Drum Sectionchap.2
Description
The ink amount variation in the ink control section is read by the electric capacity variation between thedetection needles on the ink detection PCB Unit and the GND and the ink signal is output to the main PCB
Unit. The main PCB Unit controls the motor ON and OFF by this signal.
When NO INK continues while the drum rotates 20 times (the number of drum unit rotations; it varies
depending on the printing speed.*) during printing, it is determined that the ink pack is empty, "CHANGE
INK" is displayed and the machine stops printing.
(1) Ink Detection
3. Function of Parts
\See page 115
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 111/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 112/303115
m Drum Sectionchap.2
2. "CHANGE INK" Display Timing
When HIGH (5V) is output by detecting ink while the drum continues to rotate 20 times (the number of
rotations varies depending on the printing speed.*) during printing, it is detected that the ink pack is empty,
"CHANGE INK" is displayed on the error display, and printing stops. At the same time the power for the ink
motor is turned off.
*The drum rotates until "CHANGE INK" is displayed after HIGH is output from the ink detection PCB unit
during printing. The number of drum rotations varies depending on the printing speed as follows:-
Printing speed
Number of rotations
1
17
2
20
3
24
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 113/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 114/303117
m Drum Sectionchap.2
Description
The drum switch detects whether the drum is installed to the machine.
When it is detected that there is no drum installed, "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed on the error display panel
on the control panel the machine stops operation. When no drum is detected during operation, all the
operations stops emergently.
Operation
When the drum is attached to the main body, the cam unit covers the pin and is locked firmly. The difference
of the cam unit prevents the cam unit from being loosened due to the machine vibration.
When the pin is at the bottom of the cam unit difference, the drum SW is open as shown in the figure. When
the pin is over the cam unit difference, the drum SW is closed.
Drum switch (MS4)
Main PCB Unit
White
White
CN2-10
-11
5V
5V
0
Circuit
(3)Drum Switch
LeverLever
Switch
Pin
Cam unit
23S0280
2No drum2Drum installed
23S0331E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 115/303118
m Drum Sectionchap.2
Description
The front cover switch detects opening and closing of the front cover. "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed on
the error display panel on the control panel, when it is detected that the front cover is open. When the front
cover is open, platemaking and printing is not performed. When the front cover open is detected during
printing, the machine stops immediately. (When the front cover open is detected during platemaking, the
machine stops before processing printing.)
Operation
When the front cover is closed, the lever presses the switch and is closed. When the front cover is open, the
lever is apart from the switch and is open.
Front cover switch (MS5)
Main PCB Unit
Light blue
Light blue
CN2-12
-13
5V
5V
0
Circuit
(4) Front Cover Open / Close Detection Switch
Switch
Switch Switch
Lever Lever
Front cover
23S0272
2When the front cover is open :2When the front cover is closed :
23S0332E
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 116/303119
, Optionchap.2
When attaching the TAPE
CLUSTER, set the mode to the
HELP mode 28 with TAPE
CLUSTER.
(For further details, refer to the list
of the HELP modes. If it is not set,
the TAPE CLUSTER does not work.)
IMPORTANT :
2When the number of sets is input without a TAPE
CLUSTER (optional), the following is operated.
Printing stops at the timing of feeding tape, Press
the PRINT key again to start printing.
(Manual clustering)
Description
A certain length of tape is fed and cut from the
TAPE CLUSTER to finish printing the number of
sets in the cluster printing operation. The operation
is continued to process the number of sets.
*Printing does not stop when the tape runs out
during printing.
The number of sheets for 1 set to be processed is
1 - 9999 sheets. The number of sets for
1 classification to be processed is 1 - 99 sets.
Operation
1) The TAPE CLUSTER starts to feed the tape from the last 10 sheets for the set. A fixed length of the tape is
fed and is cut after completing printing the set amount.
This operation is repeated until the last set is processed.
The fed amount of tape is different between the large and small classifications. When all the sets for 1 clas-
sification are processed, the fed amount of tape is longer (large classification). When all the sheets for 1 set
are processed, the fed amount of tape is shorter (small classification).
Fed amount of tape for small classification: about 250mm (±15%)
Fed amount of tape for large classification: about 370mm (±15%)
2) When the number of sheets for the set is less then 10 sheets, the tape is fed at the same time when printing
starts. When the number of sheets is printed before a fixed amount of tape is fed, printing for the next set
is discontinued until the tape is fed. (Paper feeding stops. The drum rotates at a low speed.)
,Option
(1) TAPE CLUSTER
HELP mode H-28 \ see p.267
Cluster tape TAPE CLUSTER
23S0028
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 117/303120
Chapter 3 Mechanism
z Exterior.......................................................................122
(1) Removal of the Document Tray...........................122
(2) Removal of the ADF Front / Rear Cover.............122
(3) Removal of the Document Cover.........................122
(4) Removal of Main PCB Cover...............................123
(5) Removal of Battery PCB
Unit and Main PCB Unit.....................................123
(6) Removal of Front Cover.......................................124
(7) Removal of Control Panel....................................124
(8)Removal of Control Panel PCB ............................124
(9) Removal of LCD Panel........................................125
(10) Removal of Drive PCB Unit
and DC Regulated Power Supply ......................125
(11) Removal of Rear Cover ......................................126
(12) Removal of the Document Receiving Tray
(Top Cover)..........................................................126
x Scanner Section........................................................127
(1) Removal of ADF Cover ........................................127
(2) Removal of Document Sensor..............................127
(3) Removal of ADF Feed Roller ...............................128
(4) Removal of ADF Paper Separator Unit ..............128
(5) Removal of Scanner JAM Sensor
(Photo-receiving) .................................................129
(6) Removal of Timing Belt.......................................129
(7) Removal of Scanner Clutch .................................130
(8) Removal of ADF Cover Opening /
Closing Switch......................................................130
(9) Removal of Scanner Stepping Motor ..................131
(10) Removal of Scanner Unit ..................................132
(11) Removal of Document Position Sensor.............132
(12) Removal of Inverter PCB Unit .........................133
(13) Removal of Lamp Unit ......................................134
c Platemaking / Master Feed and Ejection Section...135
Master Feed Section ...........................................135
(1) Removal of Cutter Unit .......................................135
(2) Removal of End Mark Sensor PCB Unit ............136
(3) Removal of Thermal Head...................................137
(4) Removal of Master Feed Unit .............................138(5)Removal of Master Feed Stepping Motor ............139
Master Ejection Section ......................................140
(1) Removal of Master Ejection Box .........................140
(2) Removal of Jam / Master Ejection Sensor
(Photo-emitting PCB Unit)..................................141
(3) Removal of Rollup Motor.....................................141
Master Clump opening/Closing Section ...........142
(1) Removal of Master Clump Opening /
Closing Unit.........................................................142
(2) Removal of Clump Motor.....................................142
(3) Removal of Timing Belt.......................................143
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 118/303121
3
v Paper Feed Section....................................................144
(1) Removal of Paper Sensor......................................144
(2) Removal of Elevator Lower Limit Switch ...........144
(3) Removal of Paper Feed Roller..............................145
(4) Removal of Paper Separator Unit........................145
(5) Removal of Paper Feed Clutch Unit ....................146
(6) Removal of Paper Feed Sensor.............................147
b Drum Driving Section ................................................148
(1) Removal of Sub-Frame .........................................148
(2) Removal of Drum Gear.........................................149
n Paper Ejection Section ..............................................150
(1) Removal of Paper Stripper Finger /
Sub Paper Stripper Finger...................................150
(2) Removal of Paper Ejection Fan Unit ...................151
(3) Removal of Paper Ejection Belt ...........................152(4) Removal of Jam Sensor
(Photo-receiving PCB Unit)..................................152
m Drum Section .............................................................153
(1) Removal of Screen ...............................................153
(2) Removal of Master Clump....................................154
(3) Removal of Base Unit...........................................154
(4) Removal of Outer Frame (Right) Unit.................155
(5) Removal of Outer Frame (Left) Assy...................156
(6) Removal of Inner Frame ......................................157
(7) Removal of Ink Pump...........................................158
(8) Removal of Ink Motor...........................................158
(9) Removal of Ink Detection PCB Unit....................159
WARNING
¡Always remove the power cord plug from the outlet before
starting work.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 119/303
(2) Removal of ADF Front / Rear Cover
(1) Removal of Document Tray
122
z Exteriorchap.3
z Exterior
1) Remove the document tray.
2) Open the ADF cover.
3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
front cover.
4) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
rear cover.
(3) Removal of Document Cover
1) Carry out (1) and (2) above.2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
document cover.
1) Lift the document tray directly upward, andremove the document tray by pulling it off the
pins of the scanner unit.
23S0032
23S0033
23S0034
Document tray Pins
Screws
Screws
Screw
Documentcover
Screw
Front cover
Rear cover
ADF cover
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 120/303123
z Exteriorchap.3
(4) Removal of Main PCB Cover
1) Carry out (1) through (3) above.
2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, then remove the
main PCB cover.
\See page 122
(5) Removal of Battery PCB Unit and Main PCB Unit
1) Carry out (1) through (3) above.
\See page 122
2) Remove the connectors:
¡ Battery PCB Unit: 1 connector
¡ Main PCB Unit: 11 connectors
3) Remove the mounting screws, and replace the
PCB units.
¡ Battery PCB Unit: 2 spacers
¡ Main PCB Unit: 4 screws
23S0035
Screws
Main PCBcover
Screws
23S0062
BatteryPCB unit
Screw Screw
ScrewScrews
Screw
Main PCB unit
WARNING
¡Always remove the power cord plug from
the outlet before replacing a PCB Unit.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 121/303
23S0056
124
z Exteriorchap.3
Screws
Front cover
1) Open the front cover, and take out the drum unit.
2) Open the document receiving tray and the
master ejection box.
3) Remove the 7 screws indicated, then remove the
front cover.
1) Remove the previously mentioned (3), (4), (6),
and (2) ADF cover (R).
2) Disconnect the connector.
3) Open the top cover.
4) Remove the two screws and carefully pull the
panel out, being careful to not damage the panel.
\See page 122
1) Remove the preciously mentioned (6) and (7).
2) Pull out the stoppers on each side of the connetor
and detach the LCD code.
3) Remove the one screw and remove the bracket.4) Remove the 11 screws and remove the control
panel PCB.
(6) Removal of Front Cover
(7) Removal of Control Panel
(8) Removal of Control Panel PCB
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
23S0057
23S0058
Screw
Screw
Connector
Control panel
Stopper
Screws Screws
Connector
LCD cord
Brack-
Control panel PCB unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 122/303
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the connectors of.
¡ Drive PCB Unit (8 connectors)
¡ DC regulated power supply (3 connectors)
¡ Mini Drive PCB Unit (connector)
3) Remove the mounting screws, and replace the
PCB units.
¡ Drive PCB Unit:4 screws
\See page 124
23S0063
125
z Exteriorchap.3
(9) Removal of LCD Panel
(10) Removal of Drive PCB Unit and DC
Regulated Power Supply
23S0059
Screw
Bracket
LCD panel
Connector
LCD cordStopper
Screw
1) Remove the previously mentioned (6) and (7).
2) Pull out the stoppers on each side of the connetor
and detach the LCD code.3) Remove the two screws and remove the LCD
panel.
Drive PCB unit
Screws
Screws
Screws
Regulated powersupply
Screws
WARNING
¡Always remove the power cord plug from
the outlet before replacing a PCB Unit.
DP-23S
Mini Drive PCBunit
DP-23S
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 123/303126
z Exteriorchap.3
(11) Removal of Rear Cover
1) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
rear cover.
1) Open the document receiving tray.
2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
hinge.
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Remove the screw indicated, then remove thebrackets.
5) Remove the document receiving tray.
23S0060
Screws
Rear cover
Screws
23S0061
Screw
Screws
Bracket
Document receivingtray(Top cover)
Hinge
(12) Removal of Document Receiving
Tray(Top cover)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 124/303127
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
(1) Removal of ADF Cover
1) Remove the ADF front / rear covers.
2) Remove the 2 screws.
3) Remove the screws on either side of the scanner
unit, and remove the hinges.
4) Remove the ADF cover.
\See page 122
(2) Removal of Document Sensor
1) Remove the ADF cover.
2) Remove the screw, and slide the bracket in the
direction of an arrow to remove.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the sensor bracet.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the
document sensor.
Scanner unit
Screw
Screw
Screw
Bracket
ConnectorDocument sensor
ScrewScrewHinge
ADF cover
x Scanner Section
23S0041
23S0044
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 125/303
23S0045
128
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
(3) Removal of ADF Feed Roller
1) Remove the ADF cover.
2) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the ADF
feed shaft in the direction of the arrow.
\See page 127
(4) Removal of ADF Paper Separator Unit
1) Carry out (1) and (2) above.
2) Remove the ADF paper separator unit.
\See page 127
3) Remove the E-rings, and remove the ADF feed
roller.
Bush
E-ringE-rings
E-rings
Roller
Roller
ADF feed roller
ADF feed shaftScrew
23S0047
23S0046
ADF paper separator unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 126/303
23S0048
23S0042
129
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
(5) Removal of Scanner JAM sensor
(Photo-receiving)
1) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
ADF cover.
2) Remove the ADF feed shaft.
3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
ADF feed inlet.
\See page 128
4) Remove the screw, together with the bracket.
5) Disconnect the connector.
6) Remove the scanner JAM sensor.
(6) Removal of Timing Belt
1) Remove the ADF front cover.
2) Loosen the tension's fixing screw.
3) Pull the timing belt off the pulley, and removethe timing belt.
\See page 122
ADF cover
Screw
Tension
PulleyE-ringTiming belt
Sensor
Connector
Bracket
Scanner JAM sensor
Screw
Screw
Screw Screw
Screw
ADF feed inlet
23S0043
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 127/303
23S0039
23S0036
130
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
(7) Removal of Scanner Clutch
1) Remove the ADF rear cover.
2) Remove the document cover.
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors.4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the
angle.
5) Remove the scanner clutch.
\See page 122
\See page 122
(8) Removal of ADF Cover Opening /
Closing Switch
1) Remove the ADF rear cover.
2) Remove the 2 terminals.
3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
ADF cover opening / closing switch.
\See page 122
Screw
Screw
Screws
Terminals
Scanner
clutch
Connectors
ADF cover opening / closing switch
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 128/303
23S0040
23S0037
131
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
Motor cover
GearScrew
Screw
(9) Removal of Scanner Stepping Motor
1) Remove the ADF rear cover.
2) Remove the document cover.
3) Remove the 4 screws indicted, and remove themotor cover.
\See page 122
\See page 122
4) Disconnect the connector.
5) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
scanner stepping motor.
Screws
Screws
Scanner steppingmotor
Connector
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 129/303
23S0052
23S0050
23S0038
132
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
Screws 4 connectors
Screws
Screws
Screw
Screws
Scanner unit
Guide plate
Connector
Documentposition sensor
(10) Removal of Scanner Unit
1) Remove the document tray.
2) Remove the ADF front / rear covers.
3) Remove the document cover.
4) Disconnect the 4 connectors.
5) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the
scanner unit.
\See page 122
\See page 122
\See page 122
(11) Removal of Document Position Sensor
1) Remove the scanner unit.
2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the
guide plate.
3) Disconnect the connector.4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the
document position sensor.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 130/303
23S0051
133
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
Screw
Screw
Guide plate unit
Connectors
InverterPCB unit
(12) Removal of Inverter PCB Unit
1) Remove the scanner unit.
2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
guide plate unit.
\See page 132
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors indicated, and
remove the inverter PCB unit.
23S0053
WARNING
¡Always remove the power cord plug from
the outlet before replacing the Inverter PCBUnit.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 131/303
23S0281
23S0054
134
x Scanner Sectionchap.3
Bracket Screw
Connector
Cord clamp
BracketScrew
Lamp unit
Lamp unit
(13) Removal of Lamp Unit
1) Remove the scanner unit.
2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
guide plate unit.
3) Remove the cord clamp.
4) Disconnect the connector.
\See page 133(12)w
\See page 132
5) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the bracet
in the direction of an arrow to remove.
6) Remove the lamp unit.
Be careful not to break the lamp.IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
23S0282
¡ Insert the lamp unit's grooves into the slots in
the brackets.
Lamp unit
Groove Groove
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 132/303
WARNING
¡Keep hands and fingers away from the cutter
unit's blades. Do NOT touch the blades.
23S0066
23S0065
135
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
c Platemaking / Master Feed and Ejection Section
(1) Removal of Cutter Unit
1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out
the master roll.
2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the
cover F and R.
3) Disconnect the 1 connectors indicated.
4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the
stopper.
5) Open the master cover.
6) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
cutter unit.
Master Feed Section
Screws
Screw
ScrewsCover R
Cover FStopperConnector
Screw
Screw
Master cover
Cutter unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 133/303136
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of End Mark Sensor PCB Unit.
1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out
the master roll.
2) Open the master cover.
3) Remove the 2 nuts with a spanner, and remove the
cover.
4) Remove the 2 screws.
5) Disconnect the connector indicated, and the end
mark sensor PCB unit.
23S0070
23S0071
Nut
NutCover
Screws
Connector
Cover
End mark sensor PCB unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 134/303
23S0069
137
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
¡Do not touch the heat emission parts of the
thermal head.
¡The thermal head is also liable to corrode. To avoid
corrosion, keep the head free of moisture and salinity,
and do not touch its heat emission parts. Touching
these parts could scratch them.
IMPORTANT :
(3) Removal of Thermal Head
1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out
the master roll.
2) Open the master cover.
3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
guide plate.
4) Remove the screw indicated, together with the
collar.
5) Disconnect the thermal head's 2 connectors, and
remove them together with the bracket.
6) Remove the 2 screws together with the collars,
and remove the thermal head.
23S0067
Screw
ScrewGuide plate
23S0068
Screw,collar
Connectors
Collar
Screw
Collar
Screw Thermal headWhen the thermal head is replaced,
set the HELP 44 DIP switch.
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
HELP mode H-44 \ see p.280
Do not touch the heat emission parts
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 135/303
23S0072
23S0073
23S0074
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
9) Remove the bundle wire from the 2 connectors of
the thermal head PCB and the clamp.
10) Close the master cover.
11) Disconnect the 4 connectors.
12) Remove the 6 screws indicated, and remove the
master feed unit.
\See page 137 Master feed unit
1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out
the master roll.
2) Take out the drum unit.
3) Remove the front cover.
4) Remove the under cover's 4 screws, and remove
the under cover.
\See page 124
5) Remove the 2 covers shown in the figure.
6) Disconnect the 2 connectors indicated.
7) Open the master cover.
8) Remove the guide plate.
\See page 137
(4) Removal of Master Feed Unit
Screws
Screws
Under cover
138
Cover RScrews
Screws
Screw
Connectors
Screws
Connectors
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 136/303139
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
1) Remove the master feed unit.
2) Remove the 4 screws.
3) Remove the bush indicated, and remove the
mater feed stepping motor.
\See page 138
(5) Removal of Master Feed Stepping Motor
Screws
Master feed stepping motor
Bush
Screw
23S0075
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 137/303140
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the 3 connectors.
3) Remove the cord band.
\See page 126
4) Remove the screw.
5) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the
master ejection box.
(1) Removal of Master Ejection Box
Master Ejection Section
Master ejection box
Screws
Screw
Connector
Connector
Connector
Cord band
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 138/303141
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of Jam / Master Ejection
Sensor (Photo-emitting PCB Unit)
1 ) Remove the master ejection box.
2) Remove the respective photo-emitting PCB units
by removing the 2 screws.
1) Remove the master ejection box.
2) Remove the 1 screw indicated, and remove the
cover.
3) Remove the timing belt from the pulley at the
part shown by the arrow.
4) Remove the 3 motor mounting screws indicated,
and remove the roll - up motor.
Do not forget to adjust the tension
after the motor is attached.
\See page 165
IMPORTANT :
(3) Removal of Roll - up Motor
Reinstallation
Jam sensorphoto-emitting
PCB unit
Screw
Cover
Screws Motor
Timing belt
Pulley
Master ejectionsensor photo-emitting PCB
unit
Screw
\See page 140
\See page 140
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 139/303
23S0078
142
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
(1) Removal of Master Clump Opening / Closing Unit
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the drum.
3) Move the position of the master clump opening /
closing lever to the mode other than A mode.
(Use the HELP 20)
4) Turn the power off and turn it on again.
The opening / closing lever moves to the B modeand stops.
HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260
\See page 126
5) Pull out 3 connectors.
6) Remove 3 screws to take out the opening / closing
unit.
1) Remove the master clump opening / closing unit.2) Loosen the set screw to remove the gear.
3) Remove 3 screws to take out the motor.Set screw
Screws
Screw
(2) Removal of Clump Motor
Master Clump opening/Closing Section
23S0077
Screws
Connectors
Connector
Screws
Master clump
opening / closing unit
Clump motor
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 140/303
23S0080
23S0079
143
c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3
1) Remove the master clump opening / closing unit.
2) Loosen 2 screws to loosen the tension as shown
in the figure.
\See page 142
3) Remove the screw to remove the angle.
4) Remove the timing belt.
• Adjust tension by adjusting the master feed mas-
ter clump opening/closing lever and master ejec-
tion master clump opening/closing lever. Then fit
the timing belt on.
Adjust the A, B and C modes after
the master clump opening / closing
unit is attached to the printer mainbody.
IMPORTANT :
Main frame R
Master ejection masterclump opening/closing leverPosition hole
Position hole
Master feed master clumpopening/closing lever
Master clumpopening/closing unit
Tension Screws
Screw
Timing belt
Screw
(3) Removal of Timing Belt
\See page 166
Reinstallation
23S0082
\See page 167
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 141/303
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the
bracket.3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the eleva-
tor lower limit switch.
\See page 124
144
v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of Elevator Lower Limit Switch
After reinstalling the elevator lower
limit switch, carry out adjustment
of its clearance.
\For adjustment method see page 173
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
Feed tray
(1) Removal of Paper Sensor
1) Access HELP mode H-02, and use it to raise the
elevator to its uppermost position.
HELP mode H-02 \ see p.241
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper
sensor.
v Paper Feed Section
23S0083
23S0084
23S0085
Paper sensor
Connector
Screws
Elevatorlower
limit switch
Connector
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 142/303
23S0088
23S0087
23S0086
145
v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3
(3) Removal of Paper Feed Roller
1) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the paper
feed shaft in the direction of the arrow.
(4) Removal of Paper Separator Unit
1) Loosen the set screws indicated, and move the 2
paper feed rollers clear of the paper separator
unit.
2) Remove the paper separator unit.
2) Loosen the set screw indicated, and remove the
paper feed roller.
¡ Reinstall the paper feed roller so that the set
screw is positioned at the paper feed roller
shaft's counter bore.
Do not use an old paper feed roller
together with a new one.
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
After reinstalling the paper separa-
tor unit, carry out adjustment of its
clearance.
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
Screw Paper feed shaft
Paper feed roller Paper feed rollers
Paper feed rollers
Set screw
Set screws
Set screws
Paper separator unit
\See page 171
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 143/303
23S0091
23S0092
23S0089
23S0090
146
v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3
(5) Removal of Paper Feed Clutch Unit
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector.
3) Remove the screw indicated, and disconnect thepaper feed shaft from the coupling.
\See page 126
4) Remove the 3 screws indicated, and remove the
bracket.
5) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
bush.
6) Remove the E-ring.
7) Remove the adjustment washers.
8) Remove the clutch unit coil, loosen the 2 adjust
bolts, and remove the clutch body.
Screw
Connector
Paper feed shaft
Adjust washers
Adjust washers
E-ring
E-ring
Clutch unit coil
Clutch body
Bush
Screws
Screws
Screw Bracket
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 144/303
23S0094
23S0093
147
v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3
(6) Removal of Paper Feed Sensor
1) Remove the paper feed shaft.
2) Remove the paper separator unit.
3) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the
bracket.
\See page 145
\See page 145 (3)q Paper feed shaftBracket
Screws Screws
Paper feed sensorConnector
Screw
4) Disconnect the connector.
5) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the
paper feed sensor.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 145/303148
b Drum Driving Sectionchap.3
b Drum Driving Section
(1) Removal of Sub-Frame
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the 7 screws indicated, and remove the
pump unit.
\See page 126
3) Disconnect the 6 connectors.
4) Remove the 11 screws indicated, and remove the
sub-frame.
23S0095
23S0096
Screw
Screws
Sub-frame
Screw
Screw Screw
Screw
Screws
Screws
Screw
Screws
Pump unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 146/303149
b Drum Driving Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of Drum Gear
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the Sub-frame.
3) Remove the 2 E-rings, and remove the links.
\See page 148
\See page 126
23S0097
4) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the
drum gear.
23S0098
Links
E-ring
E-ring
Screws
Drum gear
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 147/303150
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3
4) Take out the paper stripper finger and sub paper
stripper fingers from the pipe.
Adjust the paper stripper finger
after it is installed.
IMPORTANT :
n Paper Ejection Section
(1) Removal of Paper Stripper Finger /
Sub Paper Stripper Finger
1) Open the master ejection box.
2) Remove the set screws.
3) Remove the paper stripper finger and sub paper
stripper fingers from the shaft.
Paper stripper finger
Paper stripper finger
Sub paper stripper fingers
Sub paper stripper finger
Pipe
Pipe
Reinstallation
\See page 180
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 148/303151
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of Paper Ejection Fan Unit
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector.3) Open the front cover, and remove the drum.
4) Remove the front cover.
5) Disconnect the connector.
6) Open the master ejection box.
7) Remove the 2 screws from the cover, and remove
the cover.
\See page 124
\See page 126
8) Remove the 6 screws indicated, and remove the
jump plate F/R units.
9) Remove the 4 screws, and pull out the paper
ejection fan unit sliding in the direction of an
arrow.
23S0099
23S0100
23S0101
CoverScrews
Connector Connector
Jump plate F unit
Jump plate R unit
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Paper ejection fan unit
¡Insert the driving shaft coupler to install the
paper ejection fan unit.
Reinstallation
23S0105
Drive shaft coupler(Paper ejection fan unit)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 149/303
23S0104
23S0103
23S0102
152
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3
1) Remove the paper ejection fan unit.
2) Pull the paper ejection belts wider apart to
expose the screws, and secure the belts in that
position.
3) Remove the 2 screws securing the sensor
mounting angle, and remove the angle.
\See page 151
4) Remove the 2 screws from the sensor PCB, and
remove the PCB.
Do not lose the 2 spacers.IMPORTANT :
Remove the 2 screws with a driver
Paper ejection belts
Jam sensor
Screws
Spacers
(4) Removal of Jam Sensor (Photo-receiving
PCB UNIT)
(3) Removal of Paper Ejection Belt
1) Remove the paper ejection fan unit.
2) Remove the 2 screws from the static removal
brush, and remove the static removal brush.
\See page 151
3) Remove the 2 screws from the ends of the shaft,
and remove the shaft.
4) Stretch the belts and install them oriented as
shown in the figure.
Screw
Paper ejection belts
Screw
Shaft
Static removal brush
Screws
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 150/303153
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(1) Removal of Screen
m Drum Section
1) Remove the drum.
2) Remove the clamp on the bottom end screen bar
to pull out the screen bar.
3) Remove 2 set screws on the top screen bar to pull
out the screen bar.
4) Remove the screen from the drum.
Do not rotate the drum reversely.IMPORTANT :
1) Pass the top end screen bar through the screen
(top end side).
2) Attach the top end screen bar to the drum.
Do not mistake the bottom end of
the screen for the top end.
IMPORTANT :
3) Pass the bottom end screen bar through the
screen (bottom end side).
4) Hold the bottom end screen bar in parallel with
the drum and roll it up to the drum rotating the
drum normally.
5) Tighten the screen bar with the clamp.
The stainless screen does not return
to the original state once it is folded.
Be careful to handle the screen.
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
Screw
Clamp
Screw
Screw
Screen
Top endscreen bar
Bottom endscreen bar
Screw
58mm(top end side)
20mm(bottom end side)
ScreenTop end screen bar
Screw
Bottom end screen bar
Bottom end screen bar
Clamp
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 151/303154
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(2) Removal of Master Clump
(3) Removal of Base Unit
1) Remove the screen.
2) Remove 2 screws on the operation side.3) Remove the bearing plate and spring.
4) Remove 2 screws on the anti-operation side to
take out the bearing plate.
5) Remove the master clump. The master clump is
attached to the base with the magnet.
\See page 153
Adjust the master clump after
installation.
\See page 184
IMPORTANT :
1) Remove the master clump.
2) Remove 2 screws, and remove the base unit.
Reinstallation
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Bearing plate
Spring
Master clump
Base unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 152/303155
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(4) Removal of Outer Frame (Right) Unit
1) Remove the drum.
2) Remove 2 screws on the rail and 1 screw on the
stay.
3) Remove 3 screws on the outer frame (right) unit
and knob screw.
4) Part the outer frame (right) unit a little and
remove 2 connectors.
5) Remove the outer frame (right) unit.
Reinstallation
Do not forget to adjust the rail
space after the rail is installed.
\See page 185
IMPORTANT :
Screws
Stay
Screw
Screws
Connector
Connector
Outer frame (right) unit
Screw
Rail left
Rail right
Outer frame (right) unit
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 153/303156
m Drum Sectionchap.3
Do not forget to adjust the rail
space after the rail is installed.
(5) Removal of Outer Frame (Left) Assy
1) Remove the dram.
2) Remove the screw on the rail to take out the rail.
3) Remove the screw on the stay to remove the stay.
4) Remove 4 screws.
5) Pull out the outer frame (left) assy with the
master clump open.
Reinstallation
\See page 185
IMPORTANT :
Rail left
Screws
Master clump lever
Outer frame shaft Assy
Outer frame shaft assy
Stay
Rail right
Screw
Screws
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 154/303157
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(6) Removal of Inner Frame
1) Remove the outer frame (right) unit.
\See page 155
3) Pull out the inner frame (section inside the
drum) in the direction of an arrow.
Be careful not to damage the drum
inside.
IMPORTANT :
2) Loosen 2 set screws on the supporting plate,
move the supporting plate in the direction of
arrow until it stops and fix it with the screw.
Slide the supporting plate in the direction of arrow
1 so that the supporting plate roller, roller unit and
roller are in contact with the inner surface of the
flange right and tighten the roller with the screw,
pressing the roller to the inner surface lightly.
Reinstallation
Screws
Supportingplate
Roller unit
Roller
Supporting plate
Screws
Roller
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 155/303158
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(7) Removal of Ink Pump
(8) Removal of Ink Motor
1) Remove the inner frame.
2) Loosen the screw on the hose band to remove the
hose.
\See page 157
3) Remove the screw to take out the link.
4) Remove 2 screw to take out the ink pump.
1) Remove the inner frame.
2) Cut the tie wrap.
3) Loosen the set screw to remove the rotation
plate.
4) Remove 3 screws to take out the motor.
\See page 157
Hose band Screw
Hose
Screw
Link
Ink pump
Screws
Set screwRotation plate
Motor
Screws
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 156/303159
m Drum Sectionchap.3
(9) Removal of Ink Detection PCB Unit
1) Remove the inner frame.
2) Pull out the connector.
3) Remove 2 screws to take out the ink detection
PCB Unit.
The toothed lock washer is attached
to one of the screws. Be careful not
to lose it.
IMPORTANT :
\See page 157
Confirm that the detection needle is
vertical with the PCB Unit and does
not contact anywhere, when
installing the Ink detection PCB
Unit.
IMPORTANT :
Reinstallation
Screw
Connector
Screw
Toothedlock washer
Ink detection PCB unit
Ink rollerSqueegee roller
Detection needle
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 157/303160
Chapter 4 Standards / Adjustment
z Scanner Section.........................................................162
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................162
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section.........163
Platemaking / Master Feed Section ......................163
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................163
Master Ejection Section .........................................164
(1) Attaching the Spring............................................164
(2) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................165
Master Clump opening/Closing Section ..............166
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................166
(2) Positioning the Master Clump
Opening / Closing Levers.....................................166
(3) Adjusting the A / B / C Modes..............................167
c Paper Feed Section....................................................171
(1) Adjusting the Paper Separator
Unit Clearance .....................................................171
(2) Adjusting the Paper Separation Pressure...........172
(3) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray
Upper Limit Sensor .............................................172
(4) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray
Lower Limit Switch .............................................173
(5) Adjusting the G Roll Escape Amount / Timing .....................................174
(6) Adjusting the Printing Position Sensors .............175
v Drum Driving Section ................................................176
(1) Adjusting the Stop Position .................................176
(2) Adjusting the Master Attachment /
Detachment Position ..............................................177
b Press Section ............................................................178
(1) Adjusting the Press Roll (P Roll) Sensor.............178
(2) Adjusting the Printing Area
(Press OFF Timing) ...................................................179
n Paper Ejection Section .............................................180
(1) Adjusting the Paper Stripper
Finger Clearance..................................................180
(2) Adjusting the Paper Stripper
Finger Return Stopper..........................................181
m Drum Section .............................................................182
(1) Adjusting the Ink Amount ...................................182
(2) Adjusting the Squeegee Gap................................183
(3) Adjusting the Master Clump ...............................184
(4) Adjusting the Master Clump Section ..................184
(5) Adjusting the Drum Rail Gap..............................185
DP-21S
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 158/303161
4
, Electrical System .......................................................186
(1) Adjusting Reduction / Enlargement....................186
1. Adjusting the Longitudinal R/E
on the Platemaking Side ...................................186
2. Adjusting the Longitudinal R/E
on the Reading Side...........................................186
(2) Reading Start Position .........................................187
1. Adjusting the Top End Reading
Start Position .....................................................187
2. Adjusting the Lateral (Operation Side)
Reading Start Position ......................................187
(3) Adjusting the Platemaking Start Position..........188
1. When the Scanner Is in Use..............................188
2. When in Online..................................................188
(4) Adjusting the Document Reading Darkness.......189
1. Adjusting the White Level of the
Document Darkness ..........................................1892. Adjusting the Reading Darkness......................190
(5) Adjusting of Printer Unit's Printing Speed.........191
1. Pre-stop Speed Adjustment...............................191
2. JOG Speed Adjustment.....................................191
3. Adjustment of Printing Speeds 1-3...................192
4. To Initialize Speed Settings ..............................192
. Option .........................................................................193
(1) Adjusting and Replacing the Upper /
Lower Blade for the TAPE CLUSTER.................193
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 159/303162
z Scanner Sectionchap.4
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension
Adjustment procedure
1) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to
about 700g.
¡For removal of the ADF front cover.
\See page 122
NOTE :
zScanner Section
23S0048
Set screw
Tension
Timing belt700g
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 160/303163
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
xPlatemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension
¡For removal of master feed unit.
Adjustment procedure
1) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to
about 1kg.
\See page 138
NOTE :
Platemaking / Master Feed Section
Set screw
Timing Belt
23S0108
1kg
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 161/303164
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
(1) Attaching the Spring
Set the hook on the spring
and crush it to prevent
removing.
IMPORTANT :
1) Attaching the spring between A and B.
2) Attaching the spring between B and C.
3) Attaching the spring between C, D and E.
4) Attaching the spring between D, E and F.
Master Ejection Section
A : Rubber rollerB : Driving rollerC : Inverted rollerD : Driving rollerE : Inverted rollerF : Inverted roller
qSpring T (3) L90mm
C
A
B
B
E
D
F
C
E
D
A B
C
D
E
F
rSpring T (B)(3) L220mm
wSpring T (3) L104.9mm
wSpring T (3) L104.9mm
eSpring T (B)(3) L220mm
eSpring T (B)(3) L220mm
rSpring T (B)(3) L220mm
qSpring T (3) L90mm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 162/303165
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
(2) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension
¡For removal of the master ejection box.
Adjustment procedure
1) Loosen the tensioning screw.
2) Use the tensioning screw to adjust the belt's
tension with a force of 0.75kg applied to the
tension shaft, as shown in the figure at right.
\See page 140
NOTE :
After adjustment
¡Function testing of roll-up motor
1) Access HELP mode H-18.
For basic HELP mode procedures
2) Press and hold down the "down"
PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT key.
For as long as this key is held down, the
roll-up motor will rotate in the reverse
direction (counterclockwise), causing the
rollers inside the master ejection box to rotate.
3) The motor will stop when the "down"
PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT key is
released.
4) Press the STOP key. The HELP mode menu
will reappear.
\ To exit the HELP mode:
Turn the power switch to OFF.
\ To select another HELP mode:
Enter the desired HELP mode number using the
numeric keys.
\See page 235
HELP mode H-18 \ see p.258
0.75kg
Tension
Tensioning screw
Timing belt
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 163/303
23S0079
23S0081
23S0082
23S0081
166
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
Adjustment procedure
1) Loosen the tension set screw.
2) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to
about 1kg.
After AdjustmentBe sure to adjust the A/B/C mode
after installation to the printer.
IMPORTANT :
1. Paper feed master clump opening/closing lever
When tensioning the timing belt, ensure that the
sub frame is positioned so that the upper surface of
the master clump opening/closing lever is aligned
(to within 0.5mm) with the rim of the positioning
hole.
2. Paper ejection master clump opening/closing
lever
When tensioning the timing belt, ensure that the
master clump opening/closing lever is co-centered
with the sub-frame's positioning holes.
Tension Screws
Position hole Master ejection masterclump opening/closing lever
Positioning hole
Master feed master clumpopening/closing lever
Sub-frame
Positioning hole
Master feed master clump opening/closing lever
Aligned(to within 0.5mm)
Positioning holeMain frame R
Master ejection master clumpopening/closing lever
Master Clump Opening/Closing Section
(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension
(2) Positioning the Master Clump
Opening / Closing Levers
¡For removal of master clump opening / closing unit.
\See page 142
NOTE :
After Adjustment
Be sure to adjust the A/B/C mode
after installation to the printer.
IMPORTANT :
¡For removal of master clump opening / closing unit.
\See page 142
NOTE :
¡Paper feed side
¡Paper ejection side
1kg
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 164/303167
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
uShift
yStop in frontof lever
(3) Adjusting the A / B / C Mode
¡For description of operation.
\See page 81
NOTE :
1. Adjustment for B mode
Adjustment procedure
1) Remove the drum from the machine body.
2) Access HELP mode H-20.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
\See page 235
HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260
3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master
clump open/close lever moves into the "more
open than B mode (toward C mode) position"
(see right).
4) Turn the power off, then on again.
The master clump switch lever will move into the
B mode position and stop there.5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the
machine body.
6) Open the plate ejection box. Then press the JOG
switch (drum rotator switch) to move the master
clump to a position in front of the open/close
lever, and stop it there.
7) Move the master clump, paying attention to the
clearance at the same time.
WARNING¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-
ing the JOG switch.
¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the
machine during operation. They could be
caught up or crushed in the machinery,
resulting in injury.
B mode
C mode
¡More open than B mode (toward C mode) position
¡When drum is removed from main body (A mode)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 165/303168
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
Standard value
Standard value
¡Check that the clearance between the master clump
lever and master clump open/close lever is within the
range given below.
If the clearance it outside the standard range:
1) Turn the fixing screw indicated to move the B
mode shade plate and thereby adjust the
clearance.
After adjustment
Follow the procedure below to return to the
previous state.
1) Remove the drum.
2) Access HELP mode H-20.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master
clump open/close lever moves into the A mode
position (see right).
4) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the
machine body.
\See page 235
HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260
ItemClearance between masterclump lever and master clumpopen/close lever
1.0 - 1.5mm
¡A mode
Close
Open
B mode sensor (PS4)
B mode shade plate
Fixing screw
A / C mode sensor (PS3)
Master clumpopen/close lever
Master clump lever
1.0~1.5mm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 166/303169
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
0.5-1.0mm
2. Adjustment for A and C modes
Before adjustment
A and C mode adjustment must be
carried out AFTER B mode
adjustment has been completed.
IMPORTANT :
Adjustment procedure
1) Remove the drum from the machine body.
2) Access HELP mode H-20.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
\See page 235
HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260
3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master
clump open/close lever moves into the "more
open than B mode (toward C mode) position" (see
right).
4) Turn the power off, then on again.
The master clump open/close lever will move into
the B mode position and stop there.
5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the
machine body.
6) Access HELP mode H-09.
7) Press the PRINT key to move the drum to the
master detachment position, and stop it there.
8) Use HELP20 to move the master clump open/ close lever to the C mode position.
HELP mode H-09 \ see p.248
Do not move the master clump
open/close lever towards the A
mode position from the B mode
position. Doing so will break the
master clump.
9) Open the scanner unit.
IMPORTANT :
B mode
C mode
¡More open than B mode (toward C mode) position
¡Stopping drum in master detachment position
¡When drum is removed from main body (A mode)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 167/303170
x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4
Standard value
¡Check that the clearance between the master ejection
box's rubber roller and the master clump plate is
within the range given below.
If the clearance is outside the standard range
1) Turn the fixing screw indicated to move the A/C
mode shade plate and thereby adjust theclearance. This operation adjusts the clearance
for both the A and C modes.
Do not press the master clump
against the rubber roller.
IMPORTANT :
After adjustment
Follow the procedure below to return to the
previous state.
1) Turn the power off, then on again.
The master clump open/close lever will move into
the B mode position and stop there.
2) Remove the drum.
3) Access HELP mode H-20.
4) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master
clump open/close lever moves into the A mode
position (see right).
5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the
machine body.
HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260
Standard valueItemClearance between masterejection box's rubber roller andmaster clump plate
0.5 - 1.0mm
¡A mode
Close
Open
B mode sensor (PS4)
A / C mode shade plate
A mode sensor (PS3)
Fixing screw
Rubber roller
Master clump plate
0.5~1.0mm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 168/303171
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4
cPaper Feed Section
(1) Adjusting the Paper Separator Unit Clearance
¡For description of operation .
¡For removal of paper separator unit .
Adjustment procedure
¡When the paper separator unit is installed, use
the adjustment bolt to adjust the unit so that itmoves in direction q without sticking, and
moves smoothly in direction w. Tighten the bolt's
nut to fix the unit in the adjusted position.
\See page 145
\See page 90
NOTE :
Paper separator unit
23S0106
q
w
Nut
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 169/303172
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4
(2) Adjusting the Paper Separation Pressure
¡For description of operation .
¡For removal .
Adjustment procedure
1) Apply a spring balance as shown at right, then
turn the separation pressure adjust screw so
that the balance reads 150-160g.
¡Turning the screw clockwise increases the
pressure.
¡Turning the screw counterclockwise decreasesthe pressure.
\See page 145
\See page 90
NOTE :
(3) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensor
¡For description of operation .
Adjustment procedure
1) Insert a 1mm thick strip of material between the
paper feed roller and the paper feed inlet.
2) Loosen the 2 screws indicated, then adjust the
sensor's position so that the bottom surface of
the paper feed shaft lever is at the center of thesensor.
3) After adjustment, tighten the screws.
\See page 94
NOTE :
Spring balance150-160g
Paper separation
pressure adjust screw
Screw
Paper feed trayupper limit sensor
Screw
1mm thick strip
Position bottomsurface at sensor's
center
43SH0403
23S0225
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 170/303173
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4
(4) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Switch
¡For description of operation.
¡For removal.
Adjustment method
1) Access HELP mode H-02.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes:
2) Press and hold down the "down" PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT key until the paper feed
tray is at its lowermost position. The elevator
motor will run (i.e. the paper feed tray will
descend) for as long as the key is held down.
3) Check that the dimension indicated in the figure
at right conforms to the value shown below.
\See page 235
HELP mode H-02 \ see p.241
\See page 144
\See page 95
NOTE :
If the feed length is not the standard value
1) Loosen the screws, then adjust the lower limit
switch to a position that yields the standard
clearance value.
cMoving the sensor in the direction shifts thelowermost position downward.
dMoving the sensor in the direction shifts the
lowermost position upward.
2) After adjustment, tighten the screws.
Standard value
Standard valueItem
Paper feed tray clearance inlower limit position
14mm
23S0109
23S0107
14mm
Paper feed traylower limit switch
ScrewsLevelposition
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 171/303174
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4
(5) Adjusting the G Roll Escape Amount /
Timing
Adjustment procedure
1) Turn the main motor shaft by hand, to move theescape cam. Stop turning when the bottom of the
escape cam reaches the bearing side of the
escape lever, so that the cam stops in that
position.
2) Loosen the eccentric shaft fixing screw. Then
turn the eccentric shaft to adjust the escape
amount.
¡For description of operation.
Standard value
\See page 88
NOTE :
Standard valueItem
Clearance between escapelever's bearing and escapecam's bolt
2±0.2mm
23S0228
Bearing
2±0.2mm
Eccentricshaft
Screw
Peek through the inspection hole. Escape lever
Escape cam
DP-21S
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 172/303175
c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4
(6) Adjusting the Printing Position Sensors
¡For description of operation.
1. Central sensor
Adjustment procedure
1) To adjust the sensor's position, position the
screws of the sensor bracket's rectangular holes
in the center of those holes, and fix the screws in
that position.
NOTE :
2. Limit sensor
Adjustment procedure
1) Position the screws of the sensor bracket's
rectangular holes in the center of those holes,
and fix the screws in that position.
2) Loosen the limit sensor shade plate fixing screw.
Then adjust the distance between the centerline
of the central sensor and the edge of the central
sensor shade plate to 20 ±1mm.
\See page 91
Limit sensor
Limit sensor
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Center sensor
¡Top limit
23S0229
23S0230
23S0231
Sensor bracketCenter
Center
¡Bottom limit 20mm
Sensor bracketCenter
Center
Center
Center
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 173/303176
v Drum Drive Unitchap.4
Stopper Groove
JOG switch(DRUM ROTATORswitch)
Drum stop detection edge
(1) Adjusting the Stop Position
vDrum Driving Section
Before adjustment
¡Adjusting the the drum position must be
performed AFTER printing speed adjustment
is complete.
Adjustment procedure
1) Press and hold down the JOG switch (DRUM
ROTATOR switch). Release the switch when a
"beep" tone sounds and the drum stops.
IMPORTANT :
\See page 191
¡For description of operation .
Standard position
¡The stop position is correctly adjusted when the
groove in the drum flange is aligned with the
stopper.
If the drum is not adjusted to the standard stop
position:
Adjust the position of the drum home position /
JAM detection sensor so that the stopper fits
smoothly into the groove when the drum is pulled
out.
[ Moving the sensor in this direction makes
stopping occur later.
\Moving the sensor in this direction makes
stopping occur earlier.
NOTE :
\See page 98
WARNING
¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-
ing the JOG switch.
¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the
machine during operation. They could be
caught up or crushed in the machinery,
resulting in injury.
23S0232
Screws
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 174/303177
v Drum Drive Unitchap.4
Item
Advances the stop position
Sets back the stop position
Masterattachment/det
achmentposition edge
Open/close lever
Open/close arm
+-1mm
+-1mm
(2) Adjusting the Master Attachment/Detachment Position
¡For description of operation.
1. Master detachment position
¡The correct position for stopping of the drum
(position for master detachment) is when the
center axis of the master clump open/close arm
and the center axis of the master clump open/
close lever are aligned in a straight line. Adjust
so that the offset of the alignment of these two
center axes is ±1mm (gauge this value visually).
Adjustment procedure
1) Access HELP mode H-09, the drum position
check mode.
NOTE :
4) Loosen the screws indicated, turn the master
attachment/detachment sensor shade plate a
little in the direction of the arrows, and
provisionally tighten the screws.
5) Repeat step 2), and check the center axis
alignment offset.
6) If necessary, repeat steps 2) through 5) until the
center axis alignment offset is within ±1mm.
7) Properly tighten the screws, and check 6) again.
2. Master attachment position
¡Perform adjustment of master attachment
position at the same time as that of master
detachment position. Adjust both positions
to an accuracy of ±1mm.
Standard value
Offset in alignment of centeraxes of master clumpopen/close arm and masterclump open/close lever
±1mm
\See page 99
HELP mode H-09 \ see p.248
Master attachment position
Open/close arm
Open/close lever
Master detachment
position
23S0234
23S0235
23S0236
23S0233
Screws
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 175/303178
b Press Sectionchap.4
Screws
P rollsensor
Bracket
Bracket
About1mm
(1) Adjusting the of Press Roll (P Roll) Sensor
bPress Section
¡For description of operation.
Adjustment procedure
1) Loosen the screw indicated. Then move the
sensor bracket up/down to adjust the press
roll so that when it is pushed down to the
lowest position by the cam, the distance
between the bottom of its sensor and the
end of the bracket is about 1mm.
NOTE :
\See page 105
23S0238
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 176/303179
b Press Sectionchap.4
20mm
Rear end of opening
Drum unit
Press roll
Main motor shaft
Drum flange
Mark
Press roll
Screw
Adjust collarHexbolts
Makemark here
(2) Adjusting the Printing Area (Press OFF Timing)
¡For description of operation.
Adjustment procedure
1) Make a mark on the end surface of the drum
flange, in a position 20mm forward (in the direc-
tion of the forward end) from the rear end of the
drum's opening(hole section).
2) With the press roll activated, turn the main
motor shaft by hand, and stop turning when the
press roll starts to descend (move in the direction
of the arrow).
Standard value
¡Open the front cover, and check whether the
center of the press roll is aligned with the
mark made in step 1).
NOTE :
Standard valueItem
Alignment of mark on flangeend and center of press roll
±2mm
If the alignment is not correct:
1) Loosen the 2 hex bolts indicated.
2) Loosen the adjustment collar (eccentric) fixing
screw.
3) Turn the adjustment collar (eccentric) to move
the flange and adjust the alignment.
Moving the flange upward makes turning off of
the press occur later \ thereby making the
printing range longer
Moving the flange downward makes turning offof the press occur earlier \ thereby making the
printing range shorter
\See page 103
23S0237
23S0246
23S0239
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 177/303180
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.4
WARNING
¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when
operating the JOG switch.
¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine during operation. They could be
caught up or crushed in the machinery,
resulting in injury.
Pinch lever
Roller
Lever
Main motor shaft
Paper stripper finger
Drumsurface
About0.5mm
(1) Adjusting the Paper Stripper Finger Clearance
nPaper Ejection Section
¡For description of operation.
Adjustment procedure
1) With the pinch lever raised up, turn the main
motor shaft. Stop turning when the lever's roller
is positioned at the bottom of the paper stripper
finger cam.
NOTE :
Standard value
¡Check that the clearance between the drum
surface and the paper stripper finger conforms
to the value shown below.
If the clearance is not the standard value:
1) Loosen the screw indicated and use the stopper
to adjust the clearance to the standard value.
Then retighten the screws.
After adjustment:
¡After adjustment, press the JOG switch (DRUM
ROTATOR switch) to return the drum to its
home position.
IMPORTANT :
Standard valueItem
Clearance between drum sur-face and tip of paper stripperfinger
about 0.5mm
\See page 107
23S0240
23S0247
23S0241
Screw
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 178/303181
n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.4
Pinch lever
Bracket Clearance
Screws
If the clearance is not the standard value:
Loosen the 2 screws indicated and use the
stopper to adjust the clearance to the
standard value. Then retighten the screws.
After adjustment:
¡After adjustment, press the JOG switch (DRUM
ROTATOR switch) to return the drum to its
home position.
IMPORTANT :
(2) Adjusting the Paper Stripper Finger Return Stopper
Adjustment procedure
1) Turn the main motor shaft by hand until a
clearance is opened up between the pinch lever
and the bracket.
Standard valueItem
Clearance between lever andpaper stripper finger returnstopper
about 1mm
WARNING
¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-
ing the JOG switch.
¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the
machine during operation. They could be
caught up or crushed in the machinery,
resulting in injury.
23S0242
23S0243
Standard value
¡Check that the clearance between the lever and
the paper stripper finger return stopper conforms
to the value shown below.
Lever
about1mm
Paper stripperfinger return
stopper
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 179/303182
m Drum Sectionchap.4
Adjusting the ink adjusting knob
¡For removal.
NOTE :
mDrum Section
(1) Adjusting the Ink Amount
Adjustment procedure
1) When printed too dark or too light on the
operation side:
• Too dark: switch in the (-) direction
(3 settings)
• Too light: switch in the (+) direction(3 settings)
2) When printed too dark or too light on the rear
side:
• Too dark: switch in the (-) direction
(3 settings)
• Too light: switch in the (+) direction
(3 settings)3) When printed too dark or too light on the entire
surface:
• Adjust the above 1) and 2) at the same time.
There are 7 settings, standard and
±3 settings to adjust the printing
darkness. Print more than ten
sheets every time the printing
darkness is switched by one setting
until the most desirable printingdarkness is obtained.
Repeat the above procedures until
the most desirable printing darkness
is obtained.
IMPORTANT :
Ink adjusting knob on therear side
Ink adjusting knob on theoperation side
Do not loosen set screw
¡Ink adjusting knob on the operation side
(standard position)
Too dark
Too light
\See page 153
Too dark
Too light
Do not loosen set screw
¡Ink adjusting knob on the rear side
(standard position)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 180/303183
m Drum Sectionchap.4
(2) Adjusting the Squeegee Gap
¡For removal.
Adjustment procedure
¡The gap between the squeegee and the ink roller
is adjusted as shown in the figure when the ink
amount is based on the standards.
If the ink amount does not meet the standards,
adjust it as follows:-
NOTE :
If the clearance is not the standard value
1) 2 set screws 1 are used in one place. Remove one
set screw 1 and loosen the other one. Perform the
same operation for both sides. Be careful not to
lose the removed set screws.
2) Loosen set screws 2 on both sides.
3) Adjust the gap with the adjusting screws on both
sides so that the space on both sides meets the
standards.
After adjustment
1) Tighten set screw 2.
2) Tighten set screw 1.
3) Check the gap again after the ink amount
adjusting knob is moved several times in the
direction + or -.
4) If the gap is proper, attach set screw 1 and
tighten it to fix.
Squeegee
Gap
Ink roller
SqueegeeInk roller0.030.04mm
Set screw 2
Set screw 1
¡Operation side
Adjustingscrew
Set screw 2
Set screw 1
Adjusting screw
Ink adjusting knob
\See page 153
Ink adjusting knob
¡Rear side
0.030.04mm
0.030.04mm
Standard valueItem
Clearance between squeegeeand ink roller
0.03mm-0.04mm
Standard value
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 181/303184
m Drum Sectionchap.4
(3) Adjusting the Master Clump
¡For removal.
When the master clump parallelism is not proper,
the master creases. When the master clump is not
flat, the master is easily removed and creases.
* Adjust the master clump with the set screw on the
operation side.
1. Adjusting the clump parallelism
Adjustment procedure
1) Loosen the set screws on the clump plate and
shaft to adjust the parallelism.
NOTE :
Loosen the set screw on the
operation side to adjust.
But do not loosen the set screw on
the lever shaft.
IMPORTANT :
2. Adjusting the clump flatness
Adjustment procedure
1) Cut the master, leaving 20mm wide piece at
three places, both sides and center. Have the
clump plate grip the three sections.
2) When the resistance for pulling the master out
is not stable, rotate the clump screw to adjust.
(4) Adjusting the Master Clump Section
Adjustment procedure
1) Adjust with HELP mode 29 so that the clump
amount of the master (A section in the figure) is
0~3mm with the master attached.
2) After HELP 29 adjustment, press the master set
switch and perform master set movement once.
(Be sure to remove all paper scraps.) Then
perform platemaking, and check the gripper
margin.
Set screws
Clump plate
Clump plate
Clump plate
Rubber magnet Torsion
Master
20mm
Master Master
Operation sideLever shaft
Set screws (for adjustment)
shaft
\See page 154
20mm 20mm
HELP mode H-29 \ see p.268
Master clump
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 182/303185
m Drum Sectionchap.4
(5) Adjusting the Drum Rail Gap
1. Operation side
Adjustment procedure
1) Attach the drum to the main body.
2) Loosen the set screw on the rail to adjust so that
the gap between the rail (both sides) and the
roller on the operation side is about 0.3mm.
3) Tighten the set screw to fix the rail.
2. Rear side
Adjustment procedure
1) Open the rear cover on the main body.
2) Loosen the screws on the rail to adjust so that
the gap between the roller on the rear side and
the rail right / left unit is about 0.3mm.
3) Tighten the screw to fix the rail.
Guide rail left Guide rail right
0.3mm0.3mm
Rail unit left ScrewScrew Rail unit right
23S0244
Guide rail left Guide rail right
0.3mm0.3mm
Rail unit left ScrewScrew Rail unit right
23S0245
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 183/303186
, Electrical systemchap.4
(1) Adjusting Reduction / Enlargement
1. Adjusting the Longitudinal R / E on thePlatemaking Side
Adjustment procedure
1) Set the HELP mode.
Turn the power on with the PRINTING SPEED
ADJUSTMENT keys and held down.
2) Set to H-30 (Test pattern printing mode). Press
the PRINT key with the 3 and 0 keys held
down.
3) Set the plate darkness to NORMAL, perform
platemaking and print paper*. No need to place
the document.*DP-23S : print B4 paper
*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper
Standard values:
¡Check that A section of the printed test pattern is
200 ± 0.5mm.
If the clearance is not the standard value:
1) If not, adjust with the H-22.
HELP mode H-22 \ see p.261
Adjustment procedure
1) Prepare a basic document as shown in the figure.
Draw a line (main-scanning direction) at the
position 30mm from the top end of the paper*
and at the position 200mm from the above line.
*DP-23S : print B4 paper
*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper
2) Place the document on the document table to
perform platemaking and printing.
Standard values:
¡Compare the size of A section of the printed
image with that of the basic document. Check
that the difference of the size is ±2.0 mm.
If the clearance is not the standard value:
1) If not, adjust with the H-24.
HELP mode H-24 \ see p.263
Center of the paper
,Electrical system
23S0312
¡Test pattern 3
HELP mode H-30 \ see p.269
2. Adjusting the Longitudinal R / E on the
Reading Side
Adjust the longitudinal R / E on the
reading side after the longitudinal R
/ E on the platemaking side.
IMPORTANT :
Before adjustment
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 184/303187
, Electrical systemchap.4
(2) Reading Start Position
1. Adjusting the Top End Reading Start Position
Adjustment procedure
1) Mark with 1mm interval up to 5mm from the top
end of the paper to prepare a test document.
2) Perform platemaking and printing to the same
size and to two printouts.
3) Adjust with the HELP35 so that the image of the
second printout is printed with 3mm margin left.
HELP mode H-35 \ see p.273
2. Adjusting the Lateral (Operation Side)
Reading Start Position
Adjustment procedure
1) Make a standard document (as shown in the
figure) from a sheet of paper*.
Draw a 100mm line at the position 30mm
from the right end and from the top end of the
paper*.
*DP-23S : print B4 paper
*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper
2) Compare the printed image with the basic
document.
Check the difference between the straight lines
in the main-scanning direction.
3) Adjust with the HELP H-36 so that
L1 - L2 ±3mm.
Adjusting direction
¡L1<L2 : Backward
¡L1<L2 : Toward you
HELP mode H-36 \ see p.274
¡Standard document
30mm
100mm
Mark with 1mminterval from the topend of the document
Mark this cornerwith each other
Document basic line
L2 L1
Document
Printing paper
Print ejectiondirection
Basic line of the printed sample
2 printouts
2 - 3mm
Document
23S0313
23S0314
23S0315
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 185/303188
, Electrical systemchap.4
(3) Adjusting the Platemaking Start Position
¡ Adjust the platemaking start position when in online after the printing position sensor
and master attachment / detachment position are adjusted. \See page 177
\See page 175
¡ Adjust the platemaking start position with the scanner in use after the printing position sensor
, master attachment / detachment position and top end reading start
position are adjusted.
\See page 177 \See page 175
IMPORTANT :
Adjustment procedure
1) Set the printing position (top and bottom direction)
to the standard.
2) Draw a line at the position 30mm from the top
end of the document and prepare a basic document
as shown in the figure.
3) Compare the processed image with the basic
document.
Check the difference of the lines inthe sub-scanning
direction.
4) Adjust with the HELP mode, H-37 so that
L1 - L2 ± 3mm.
Adjusting direction¡L1<L2 : Upward
¡L1>L2 : Downward
HELP mode H-37 \ see p.275
¡Standard document
HELP mode H-16 \ see p.257
Mark this corner with each other
Documentbasic line
L2
L1
Document
Printing paper
Print ejection direction
Basic line of theprinted sample
23S0316
23S0317
Draw a line at the position 30mmfrom the top end of the document
1. When the Scanner Is in Use
Before adjustment
2. When in Online
IMPORTANT :
\See page 187
Adjustment procedure
1) Perform platemaking and printing of the online test pattern. Adjust with the HELP mode, H-16 so that
the basic line is positioned ± 3mm from the top end of the paper.
Before adjustment
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 186/303189
, Electrical systemchap.4
(4) Adjusting the Document Reading Darkness
¡For description of operation.
1. Adjusting the White Level of the Document
Darkness
The basic darkness of the document (lightness of
the white section of the document = white level) is
detected by reading the document darkness. If the
white level is not proper, printed surface gets dirty
or the light section of the document is not processed
for platemaking.
NOTE :
\See page 56
Adjusting the White Level
1) Call the HELP mode.
Take the following procedures for adjustment:-
1. Text mode: H-33
2. Photograph mode: H-26
2) Input the correction value on the keypad, "0" or "1".
¡When the processed document gets dirty :
"0 1 1 1" The white level is corrected down.
¡When the thin section of the document is notprocessed for platemaking :
"1 1 1 1" The white level is corrected up.
3) Press the = key to memorize the correction
value.
4) Perform platemaking and printing to check the
darkness.
HELP mode H-26 \ see p.265
HELP mode H-33 \ see p.272
¡In the normal state
¡When the white level is too high:
¡When the white level is too low:
the section is printed dirty
the section is not processed for platemaking
Sign flag
A : 0 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Correction amount display
Correction amount display
¡HELP mode H-33/26 display
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 187/303190
, Electrical systemchap.4
2. Adjusting the Reading Darkness
Adjustment procedure
Adjust the document reading darkness in
platemaking as follows:
1) Help mode
Text mode : H-50
Photograph mode : H-23
2) Input the correction value on the keypad, "1" or
"0" (Sign flag / Collection amount display).
3) Press the= key to memorize the correction
value
4) Perform platemaking and printing to check the
darkness.
• When adjusted with the H-23 by one stage, the
standard position on the control panel changes
to 3/8 stage as follows : -
HELP mode H-23 \ see p.262
HELP mode H-50 \ see p.281
dark
light
H-50, H-23: [0001]
H-50, H-23: [0001]
Adjusting the platemaking darknesson the control panel
Normal
dark
light
dark
light
Normal
23S0318
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Correction amount display
¡HELP mode H-50/23 display
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 188/303191
, Electrical systemchap.4
Pre-stop speed
¡HELP mode H-01 display
JOG speed
¡HELP mode H-01 display
Main motor PCB unit
(5) Adjusting of Printer Unit's Printing Speed
1. Pre-stop Speed Adjustment
Adjustment procedure
1) Access HELP mode H-01.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key
repeatedly, to select PHOTOGRAPH.
3) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be
4-6rpm.
If the value is not correct:
¡Turn the main motor PCB unit's VR1 to adjust thedisplayed value to within the correct range.
4) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value will
be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will
reappear.
HELP mode H-01 \ see p.238
\See page 235
2. JOG Speed Adjustment
Adjustment procedure
1) Access HELP mode H-01.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key
repeatedly, to select TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH.
3) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be
16rpm.
If the value is not correct:
¡Turn the main motor PCB unit's VR 2 to adjust the
displayed value to the correct value.
4) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value will
be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will
reappear.
HELP mode H-01 \ see p.238
\See page 235
VR1
23S0283
Main motor PCB unit
VR2
23S0284
1 1 1 r p m
1 1 1 r p m
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 189/303192
, Electrical systemchap.4
¡HELP mode H-01 display
3. Adjustment of Printing Speeds 3
Adjustment procedure
1) Access HELP mode H-01.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH keyrepeatedly, to select TEXT.
3) Use the "down" PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
key to select SPEED 1.
4) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be
60rpm.
If the value is not correct:
¡Use the FUNCTION SWITCH and SELECT
keys to adjust the displayed value to the correct value.
5) If desired, set the other printing speeds (2,3) by
repeating steps 2) through 4) , and selecting the
desired speed in step 2).
6) (If setting the other speeds:) Check the speed values
displayed. The values should be:¡Speed 2 ... 80rpm
¡Speed 3 ... 120rpm
If the values are not correct:
¡Use the FUNCTION SWITCH and SELECT
keys to adjust the displayed values to the correct
values.
7) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value
will be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will
reappear.
4. To Initialize Speed Settings:
1) Access HELP mode H-01.
For basic HELP mode procedures.
2) Press the [=] and CLEAR key. The settings
will be initialized.
3) Press the STOP key. The HELP mode menu will
reappear.
¡After initialization, new speed values must be set.
NOTE :
C
HELP mode H-01 \ see p.238
\See page 235
HELP mode H-01 \ see p.239
\See page 235
¡HELP mode H-01 display
Mode number flashes
H E L P S E L E C T 0 1
Printing speed
1 1 1 r p m
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 190/303193
. Optionchap.4
Adjustment procedure
1) When the solenoid is pulled manually, adjust the
solenoid position up and down so that the upper
blade edge is positioned 1.5 - 2.0 mm lower than
the lower blade.
2) At the same time, adjust the space with the
adjusting washer so that the space of the blades
is about 0.5 mm when seen from the top.
.Option
(1) Adjusting and Replacing the Upper /
Lower Blade for the TAPE CLUSTER
43SH0414
Lower blade
Lower blade
Solenoid
Upper blade
Upper blade
1.5-2mm
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 191/303194
MEMO
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 192/303
195
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructions .....................196
1. Before Installation ..................................................196
2. Installation Instructions.........................................196
(1) Unpacking Checks ............................................196
(2) Assembly ...........................................................197
(3) Power Switch ON ..............................................199
(4) Setting the Master Roll ....................................200
(5) Preparation of Drum .........................................202(6) Setting the Ink Pack .........................................204
(7) Supplying Ink and Adjusting Ink Amount ......205
(8) If Option are Installed ......................................205
5
Chapter 5 Installation
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 193/303
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
196
zDUPRINTER InstallationInstructions
1. Before Installation :
Safety precautions
¡The precautions below are vital for safety and must
be taken.
WARNING
¡Do not use a source voltage other
than that specified. Do not connectmultiple loads to a single outlet.
Fire or electrical shock can result.
¡Do not place the machine in an
unstable position, such as on an
unsteady support or sloping area.
If the machine drops or falls over, a
person could get injured.
¡Do not place the machine in a
humid or dusty area. Fire orelectrical shock can result.
¡When the DUPRINTER is
installed to the printer stand, lock
the casters. Otherwise the
equipment could move or fall
over, causing injury.
¡To move the equipment, push on
the printer stand. Pushing on theDUPRINTER is dangerous and
could make the equipment fall
over.
If the optional printer stand is used:
2. Installation Instructions
(1) Unpacking Checks
¡Use only the power cord that is
provided among the accessories.
Insert the power cord plug firmlyinto the socket, so that proper
electrical contact is effected.
aUse of any other power cord could
result in imperfect grounding.
If grounding is imperfect and
electrical leakage occurs, fire or
electric shock could result.
q Packages for 1 complete DUPRINTER:
DP-23S
• 1 printer unit package (product name: DP-23S)
DP-21S
• 1 printer unit package (product name: DP-21S)
Check that the above 2 packages are present.
w Unpack the package.
Item QuantityPrinter unit proper 1
Installation instructions 1
Operation Manual 1
Warranty 1
Master ejection core 1
Power cord 1
Document Tray 1
Print Tray 1
Carry out unpacking in a place that
is safe for the work.
IMPORTANT :
e Contents checks for each package.
Check that the packages have the contents listed
below.
Printer unit package
If the optional printer stand is used, install it now
by referring to the instructions on the following
page. \See page 198
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 194/303
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
197
(2) Assembly
CAUTION
¡To lift the printer unit, hold it by its handles ONLY.
Lifting of the printer unit should be performed by
2 or more persons, not by 1 person alone.
¡Place the printer unit on a flat, level surface.
(1) Assembly of DUPRINTER
q Pull out the printer unit's 4 handles. Then lift
the printer unit up by its handles and place it in
the installation location.
23S0012
23S0013
w Push the 4 handles back in.
e Remove all the remaining fixing tape.
r Attach the Document Tray to the DUPRINTER.
23S0110
t Attach the print tray, by fitting it into the slots
in the DUPRINTER's top section.
Handles
Document tray
Handles
Pull out
Pull out
Slot in top section
Print tray
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 195/303
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
198
q Unpacking Check.
2Check that the printer stand unit package is
present.
w Unpack the printer stand unit package.
e Check that the package has the contents listed
below.
r Assemble the printer stand unit.
t Place the printer stand unit on a flat, level
surface.
y Lock the printer stand unit's casters.
u Pull out the printer unit's 4 handles.
i Lift up the printer unit by its handles, and
mount it onto the printer stand unit so that its
rubber feet mate into the recesses in the
printer stand.
o Push the 4 handles back in.
!0 Remove all the remaining fixing tape.
!1 Attac h the Do cum ent Tra y to th e
DUPRINTER.
!2 Attach the print tray, by fitting it into the slots
in the DUPRINTER's bottom section.
Carry out unpacking and assembly
in a place that is safe for the work.
IMPORTANT :
Using the optional printer stand
* Check the unit's casters for abnormality.
Item Quantity
Printer stand unit 1
23S0027
23S0023
23S0111
Pull out
Recesses Recesses
HandleHandle
Runner feet
Slot in bottom section
Print Tray
CAUTION
¡To lift the printer unit, hold it by its handles
ONLY. Lifting of the printer unit should be
performed by 2 or more persons, not by 1person alone.
Document Tray
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 196/303
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
199
q Make sure that the power switch is OFF.
w Insert the plug on one end of the power cord (one
of the accessories) into the DUPRINTER's power
inlet.
e Insert the plug on the other end of the power
cord into the power outlet.
WARNING
¡Connect the DUPRINTER to an outlet providing a
60Hz, 15A power supply of at least 120V.
¡Insert the power cord's plug correctly into the
outlet, so that electrical connection is effected
completely.
¡Position the DUPRINTER close to the power
outlet. Do not connect multiple loads to a single
outlet.
If use of an extension cord is necessary:
Extension cord should be of at least 130V, 15A
specification, conform to standard, and notexceed 5m in length.
¡The power cord should never be stepped on, or
crushed between objects. If it is, accidents could
result.
120V AC model
(3) Power Switch ON
WARNING
¡Connect the DUPRINTER to an outlet providing a
50Hz, 8A power supply of at least 230V.
¡Insert the power cord's plug correctly into the
outlet, so that electrical connection is effected
completely.
¡Position the DUPRINTER close to the power
outlet. Do not connect multiple loads to a single
outlet.
If use of an extension cord is necessary:
Extension cord should be of at least 250V, 8A
specification, conform to standard, and not
exceed 5m in length.
¡The power cord should never be stepped on, orcrushed between objects. If it is, accidents could
result.
r Turn the power switch ON.
t Check the liquid crystal display on the operation
panel.
¡The display should function normally.
230V AC model
23S0010
Power cordPower inlet
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 197/303
23S0004
23S0005
23S0006
23S0003
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
200
(4) Setting the Master Roll
q Open the document receiving tray.
r Pull the lever, and open the master cover.
w Pull the new master roll out of its bag, theninsert it into the machine, making sure that its
seal is correctly oriented.
Master cover
Lever
WARNING¡Do not remove the cover affixed with
Warning Label 1.
¡Personnel can get injured by the movable
cutter installed inside.
WarningLabel 1
t Pull out the master, and pass it under the bar.
e Peel off the seal. (First make sure that the end of
the roll with the green line is at the control
panel side.)
Seal
Bar
Green line
y Push in the master, aligned with the set line,
until the master's leading edge contacts the
interior surface.
SET LINE
23S0001
23S0002
Master rollPay attention to orientation
Document receivingtray
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 198/303
23S0007
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
201
u Close the master cover.
o Gently close the document receiving tray.
i Push the master set lever.
23S0008
23S0009
Master cover
Master set lever
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 199/303
23S0017
23S0018
23S0019
23S0015
23S0016
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
202
(5) Preparation of Drum
WARNING
¡Do not touch the drum or rollers when you
operate the jog switch.
¡Do not put hands inside machine while it is
operating.
Hands could get caught up or crushed.
q Press the jog switch (drum rotator switch).
Hold down until the drum stops with a beep.
w Open the front cover toward you.
e Lift up the drum securing lever.
While lifting the lever up, pull out the drum
handle toward you, pulling it straight out until it
stops.
Drum securing lever
Front cover
CAUTION¡Hold the drum level and place it on a flat, solid
surface.
¡The stainless screen does not return to the original
state once it is folded. Be careful to handle the
screen.
r Grip the upper drum shaft with your other hand,
and pull the drum out toward you while slightly
lifting the near end of the drum.
Upper drum shaft
t Move the lever with a hand to open and close the
master clump once or twice.
y Hold the drum level and place the drum guide
roller onto the rail in the machine.
Rail
Master clump
Roller
Drum
23S0014
Jog switch
q
w
e
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 200/303
23S0020
23S0021
23S0022
23S0014
23S0023
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
203
u Let go of the handle far end of drum, and push
the drum in about 10 cm while slightly lifting
the near end of the drum.
i Hold the drum level and push it in gently until it
stops.
o Lift the drum securing lever toward you while
pushing the drum in.
!0 Push down the securing lever tightly with the
drum inside the machine.
Drum securing lever
!1 Close the front cover.
Front cover
WARNING
¡Do NOT touch the drum or rollers when you
operate the jog switch.
¡Do NOT put hands inside machine while it is
operating.
Hands could get caught up or crushed.
!2 Press the jog switch (drum rotator switch).
Continue pushing until the drum stops with a
beep.
Jog switch
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 201/303
23S0026
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
204
(6) Setting the Ink Pack
q Open the front cover.
w Hold the ink pack holder release lever and pull it
toward you.
e Twist open the cap of the new ink pack.
CAUTION
¡Do not leave an uncapped INK PACK for a
period longer than necessary.
r Insert the ink pack so that the groove on the LIP
fits into the "U" groove of the holder.
Ink pack
Holder
Holder
Ink pack
Front cover
Holder release lever
Ink pack
t Push the ink pack to the set line on the ink pack.
y Push the side of the holder in with the palm of
your hand.
u Close the front cover.
"U" groove of holder
Front cover
23S0015
23S0024
23S0025
Set line
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 202/303
z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5
205
q Invoke the HELP mode.
While holding down the PRINTING SPEED
ADJUSTMENT keys and simultaneously,
turn the power on.
w Supply ink using HELP04.
Enter <0> <4> from the keypad and then press
the PRINT key.
Drum will begin to rotate while the ink pump
starts operation.After completion of supplying
ink, drum will stop rotating with continuousbeep sounds.
In general, it takes approx.30 seconds to supply
ink.
e Turn the power OFF and then ON again.
r Perform platemaking and printing of the
document.
For more information, refer to
"Platemaking and printing procedure"in the Instruction Manual.
The image will be light since ink is
not fully spread over the drum
surface. It is not a trouble.
Continuously print approx.20 sheets.
IMPORTANT :
t Once ink is fully spread, check the printed
image.If the density varies between the near and
far areas of paper, make adjustment according to
the "Adjusting Ink Amount".
e When the whole area of paper is darker or
lighter, turn stepwise the Ink Amount
Adjustment Knob on both sides in the "4" or
"3" direction respectively (3 steps).
2. Adjusting Ink Amount
Setscrew Never loosen!
Setscrew Never loosen!
Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on the near side
(Standard Position)
Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on the far side
(Standard Position)
(7) Supplying Ink and Adjusting Ink
Amount
1. Supplying Ink
(8) If Options are Installed
Optional equipment should be installed AFTER the
machine itself has been installed and test-run to
check that it functions normally. For the procedure
for installing optional equipment, see the
Installation Procedures supplied with it.
q When the near area is darker or lighter, turn
stepwise the Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on
the near side in the "4" or "3" direction
respectively (3 steps).
w When the far area is darker or lighter, turn
stepwise the Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on
the far side in the "4" or "3" direction
respectively (3 steps).
The Ink Amount Adjustment Knob
has a total of 7 positions : 3
positions for each of "4" and "3"
directions as well as a standard
position.When adjusting the image
density, you should print the image
on dozens of sheets to stabilize the
density every time you change it by
every step.
Repeat the above steps until you
get desired print density.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 203/303206
MEMO
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 204/303207
z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance.......................208
x Cleaning and Oiling ..................................................208
(1) Cleaning ...............................................................208
(2) Oiling ....................................................................208
c Periodical Maintenance ............................................209
(1) 6-month Periodical Checking ..............................209
(2) Criteria for Replacing the Primary Parts ...........209
6
Chapter 6 Maintenance/Check
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 205/303
z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance x Cleaning and Oilingchap.6
208
zGuaranteed PeriodicalMaintenance
(1) Cleaning
Do not oil the pinch lever bearing section. Clean it.IMPORTANT :
•The serviceman will visit the user periodically after delivery. The maintenance operation described in the
periodical maintenance list is performed and instructs how to follow the operation.
When the serviceman is called by telephone, the following maintenance must be performed after clearing
the trouble.
1. Cleaning the document.
2. Cleaning the document table glass.3. Cleaning the thermal head.
xCleaning and Oiling
1.Paper shreds:
Clean with a brush or dry cloth.
Clean the mirror and reflection plate in the scanner section with a blower brush.
2.Ink:
Clean with soap.
Oil or grease after ink or paper shreds are removed.
(2) Oiling
2.Gear section:
Grease the gear section after removing paper shreds on the bottom of gear.
1.Bearing section:
Oil the edge surface and bearing sections with oiler, rotating the lever and roller.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 206/303
c Periodical Maintenancechap.6
209
(1) 6-month Periodical Checking
cPeriodical Maintenance
Section to be checked Description Remarks
Shading plate Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth
Glass Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth
Lamp Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth
Reflection mirror Cleaning Remove dust with blower brush
Thermal head Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth (Do not damage the thermal head)
Platen roller Cleaning Remove paper shreds (Do not damage the platen roller)
Sensor Cleaning Remove dust with blower brush
Press roller Cleaning Remove paper shreds
Drum exterior Cleaning Remove ink and paper shreds
Paper feeding section Checking Paper is fed smoothly. Remove paper shreds
Plate making section Checking Paper is fed smoothly. Remove paper shreds
Roller shaft / bearing Oiling Except for the pinch lever bearing section
Gear Greasing
Air pump Greasing
Escape cam Greasing
(2) Criteria for Replacing Primary Parts
No. Item Criterion Remarks
1 Paper feed roller 300,000 sheets or more
2 Paper separator unit 300,000 sheets or more3 Thermal head About 20,000 plates or one year Up to 10 voids
4 Drum unit Printing 1,000,000 sheets or one year Overhaul
5 Air pump Printing 1,000,000 sheets or one year
6 Tape cutter upper/lower blade Cutting 10,000 times or one year
7 Press roller 1,000,000 sheets or one year
8 Lamp 10,000 plates or one year
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 207/303210
MEMO
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 208/303211
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
z Troubleshooting Guide ............................................212
1.Countermeasures for the Defective Operation ...212
(1) "LAMP NG" is displayed ....................................213
(2) Lamp does not Light Up ....................................213
(3) "E001" is displayed ............................................214
(4) "E002" is displayed ............................................215
(5) "E008" is displayed ............................................216
(6) "E009" is displayed ............................................216(7) "E0014"(LPU) is displayed ................................216
(8) "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed ........................217
(9) "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed ...................217
(10) Malfunction of Master Feeding Clutch ...........218
(11) Malfunction of Platemaking Stepping Motor .218
(12) "MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed ............219
(13) Malfunction of Roll-up Motor ..........................219
(14) "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed ..................220
(15) "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed ............220
(16) "DOC. TRAY OPEN" is displayed ...................221
(17) "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed ...............221
(18) "EXCHANGE INK" is displayed .....................222
(19) "SET KEYCARD" is displayed ........................222
(20) "DOCUMENT JAM" is displayed,
when power turned on .........223
(21) "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is displayed ................224
(22) "PAPER LEFT JAM" is displayed ...................225
(23) "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" is displayed ............225
(24) Paper Jams in the Paper Feed Side ................226
(25) Paper Jams in the Paper Eject Side ................227
x Error Display .............................................................228
7
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 209/303212
1. Countermeasures for the Defective Operation
Massage Remarks No. Page
DOC. TRAY OPEN
DOCUMENT JAM
DRUM NOT SET
EXCHG. EJECT-CORE
EXCHANGE INK
FRONT COVER OPEN
LAMP NG
MAST. EJECT ERROR
MASTER SET MISS
PAPER LEFT JAM
PAPER RIGHT JAM
ROLL MASTER END
SET KEYCARDSET KEYCARD
SET PRINT PAPER
When power turned on
Specification for export
Specification for domestic
(16)
(20)
(8)
(23)
(18)
(15)
(1)
(12)
(9)
(22)
(21)
(17)
(19)
(19)
(14)
222 (English)
222 (Japanese)
221
223
217
225
222
220
213
219
217
225
224
221
220
(3) 214
(4) 215
(5) 216
(6) 216
(7) 216
E001
E002
E008
E009
E014 Machine with LPU connected
Item No. Page
Lamp does not light up
Malfunction of master feeding clutch
Malfunction of platemaking stepping motor
Malfunction of roll-up motor
Paper JAM in the paper eject side
Paper JAM in the paper feed side
(2)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(25)
(24)
213
218
218
219
227
226
zTroubleshooting Guide
¡When the messages listed below are displayed on the LCD or when trouble such as malfunctioning or a paper
jam occurs, proceed with an inspection following the procedure for the item and take measures accordingly.
Message List
Error item List
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 210/303213
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(1) "LAMP NG" is displayed
HELP mode H-08 \ see p.247*
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Lamp does not light up 1 NO Refer to “Lamp does not light up”.
ADF cover 2 YES Finish.(Scanner cover)
Mirror 3 YES Install mirror in place.
Main PCB unit
4 YES Replace main PCB unit.
Does lamp light up when power is
turned on for an instant?
Is trouble cleared by closing ADFcover and then turning OFF and ON
or pressing “ALL CLEAR” key?
Is mirror dropped off or broken?
HELP mode(H-08)*: Is CCD photo-
receiving data not less than 26?
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.
2 YES Proceed to procedure 4.
Lamp 3 YES Finish.
Inverter PCB Unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace inverter
PCB unit.
Drive PCB unit 4 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Drive PCB unit 5 YES Check bundled wire and
connectors on primary side and
if necessary replace drive PCB
unit.
Thermal head 6 YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace thermal
head.
Regulated power supply 7 NO Check bundled wire and
connectors on primary side and
if necessary replace regulated
power supply.
Drive PCB unit YES Check bundled wire, connectors
and DC motor and replace drive
PCB unit.
Does voltage between drive PCB unit
CN7-3(+) and CN7-2(GND) show
+24V?
Does lamp light up when drive PCB
unit CN5-1 is short-circuited to GND?
Is trouble cleared by replacing lamp?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN2-1(+) and CN3-
1(GND) show +24V?
Is measured voltage by procedure 1
+24V after drive PCB unit CN6 is
pulled out?
Is measured voltage by procedure 5
+24V after drive PCB unit CN7 is
pulled out?
(2) Lamp does not Light Up
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 211/303214
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(3) "E001" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.
Main motor PCB unit 2 YES Finish.Main PCB unit NO Replace main PCB unit.
Drum interferes with body. 3 YES Eliminate interference.
Drive system gear broken 4 YES Check if drive system gear is
or blocked with foreign broken or blocked with foreign
matter. matter and remove cause.
Main PCB unit 5 YES Check bundled wire and
connectors, and if necessary
replace main PCB unit.
Main motor PCB unit 6 YES Finish.
Main motor NO Replace main motor.
Does drum rotate?
Is trouble cleared by replacing mainmotor PCB unit?
Does motor rotate without drum?
Does main motor rotate without the
driving timing belt?
Does main motor rotate at pre-stop
speed if main motor PCB unit CN3-8
is short-circuited to GND?
Is the trouble cleared by replacing
main motor PCB unit?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 212/303215
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(4) "E002" is displayed
Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked
Feed tray operation is
defective 1
Does the elevator motor work when the
chain is removed from the feed tray?YES
Remove the cause of defective operation.
Lean or catch?
2
Check with the HELP modes, H-06, H-
07. Are the elevator top limit sensor
and the elevator bottom limit switch
noraml?
NO
• Follow the procedure 6 when the
elevator top limit sensor is defective.
• Follow the procedure 8 when the
elevator bottom limit sensor is defective.
Regulated power supply 3
Remove the drive PCB Unit CN2.
Measure the voltage between the regu-
lated power supply, CN1-1(+), CN1-2
(GND) with the tester. Is the voltage
+24 V?
NO Replace the regulated power supply.
Elevator motor 4
Measure the voltage between the main
PCB Unit CN3-1 (GND) and CN3-2 (+)
with the tester at the timing of the ele-
vator motor operation. Is the voltage
+24V whether the elevator motor relay
connector is inserted or not?
YES Replace the elevator.
Drive PCB Unit5
Is the cause cleared by replacing the
drive PCB Unit?
YES Finish.
Elevator motor NO Replace the elevator motor.
Main PCB Unit 6
Measure the voltage between the main
PCB Unit CN6-2 (+) and GND with the
tester. Is the voltage of the elevator top
limit sensor 0V at the time of pho-
topassing and 5V at the time of pho-
tointerrupting?
YES Replace the main PCB Unit.
Main PCB Unit7
Measure the voltage between the main
PCB Unit CN6-1 (+) and CN6-3 (GND)
with the tester. Is the voltage +5V?
YES Replace the main PCB Unit.
Elevator top limit sensor YES Replace the elevator top limit sensor.
Elevator bottom limit SW8
Check the elevator bottom limit switch
with the tester. Is the switch turned on
or off normally?
NO Replace the elevator bottom limit SW.
Main PCB Unit YES Replace the main PCB Unit.
HELP mode H-06 \ see p.245*
HELP mode H-07 \ see p.246*
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 213/303216
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked
Online set PCB Unit 1Is the cause cleared by replacing the
online set PCB Unit ?YES Finish.
Online code 2 Is the cause cleared by replacing theonline code ?
YES Finish.
IPC I/F PCB Unit3
Is the cause cleared by replacing the
IPC I/F PCB Unit ?
YES Finish.
Main PCB Unit NO Replace the Main PCB Unit.
(5) "E008" is displayed
(6) "E009" is displayed
Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked
Main PCB Unit 1
Use a tester to measure the voltage
between DC regulated power supplyCN2-1(+) and the frame (GND). Is the
voltage 16 - 18V during platemaking
(thermal head ON)?
YESChech the bundled wire and connector.
If OK, replace the main PCB Unit.
Thermal head 2Disconnect all the thermal head con-
nectors, and measure the voltage in 1)
above. Is the voltage 16V approx.?
YESChech the bundled wire and connector.
If OK, replace the thermal head.
Drive PCB Unit3
Disconnect DC regulated power supply
CN2 and drive PCB CN7, and measure
the voltage in 1) above. Is the voltage
16V approx.?
YESChech the bundled wire and connector.
If OK, replace the drive PCB Unit.
Regulated power supply NO Replace the regulated power supply.
(7) "E014" is displayed
Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked
1Execute printing in the regular mode.
Does the guide roller drive motor turn?YES Follow the procedure 5.
Thermal head
press motor YESCheck the bundled wire. If OK, replace
the guide roller drive motor.2
Execute printing in the regular mode,
and measure the voltage between the
drive PCB unit's CN4-9 (+) and CN4-10
(GND). Is the voltage +24V?
Mini drive PCB unit NO
Check the bundled wire and connectors
between the drive PCB unit's CN10 and
the mini drive PCB unit's CN1. If OK,
replace the main PCB unit.
Regulated power supply
Guide roller sensor 5Replace the guide roller sensor. Is the
problem solved?YES Finish.
Measure the voltage between the DC
regulated power supply's CN2-1 (+)
and CN3-1 (GND).Is the voltage +24V?
3 Replace the regulated power supply.NO
Drive PCB unit
4Replace the drive PCB unit. Is the prob-
lem solved?
Finish.YES
(only in machine with Long Paper Unit connected)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 214/303
(8) "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Drum setting. 1 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit 2 YES Check if drum SW (MS4) isinstalled in place and replace
main PCB unit.
Drum SW 3 NO Replace drum SW (MS4).
Main PCB unit YES Check if drum SW (MS4) is
installed in place and replace
main PCB unit.
Is trouble cleared by setting drum
again?
Does drum SW (MS4) checked byHELP mode (H-08)* prove to be nor-
mal?
Does drum SW (MS4) checked by
volt-ohm-milliammeter prove to be
normal?
HELP mode H-08 \ see p.247*
(9) "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
End mark sensor PCB 1 NO Adjust VR for end mark sensor
unit (PS3) by HELP mode (H-13)*. If un-
able,replace end mark sensor
PCB unit.
VR must be adjusted after
replacement of end mark sensor
PCB unit.
Master feeding clutch
2NO Refer to “(10) Malfunction of master
(CL1) feeding clutch (CL1)”.
Platemaking stepping 3 NO Refer to “(11) Malfunction of
motor (PM2) platemaking stepping motor
(PM2)”.
Cutter unit 4 NO Replace cutter unit.
Static electricity 5 YES Remove static-eliminating brush.
Master 6 YES Finish.
Transfer path NO Remove any foreign matter in
transfer path.
IMPORTANT:
Has “MASTER SET MISS” actually
occurred?
Does master feeding clutch (CL1)
operate normally?
Does platemaking stepping motor
(PM2) operate normally?
Is master cut normally?
Is static-eliminating brush on master
feeding unit damaged or deteriorated?
Is trouble cleared by replacing mas-
ter?
HELP mode H-13 \ see p.252*
\ see page 218
217
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
\ see page 218
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 215/303218
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(10) Malfunction of Master Feeding Clutch
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Regulated power supply 1 NO Replace regulated power supply.
Master feeding clutch 2 YES Check wiring and replace master
(CL1) feeding clutch.
Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1
(GND) show 24V?
Does voltage between drive PCB unit
CN4-7 (+) and -8 (GND) show 24V
when master feeding clutch is turned
on?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
(11) Malfunction of Platemaking Stepping Motor
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Load on drive system 1 YES Finish.
Regulated power supply 2 NO Replace regulated power supply.
Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is trouble cleared by adjusting tension
of the master feeding unit timing belt
or supplying oil to bearing?
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1
(GND) show 24V?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 216/303219
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(12) "MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed
(13) Malfunction of Roll-up Motor
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 YES Proceed to procedure 5.
Foreign material or dirt on 2 YES Remove any foreign matter andsensors. clean.
Master ejection sensor 3 YES Finish.
photo-receiving (PS13)
Master ejection sensor 4 YES Finish.
photo-emitting PCB
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Roll-up motor (M4) 5 NO Refer to “(13) Malfunction of roll-up
motor (M4)”.
Master clump dirty. 6 YES Clean master clump section.
Master ejection box 7 YES Replace any damaged stripper
finger or springs.
Drum master ejection 8 NO Adjust the drum master ejection
stop position stop position.
C mode YES Check and adjust C mode.
Has “MAST. EJECT ERROR” actually
occurred?
Are there any foreign matter or dirtbetween the master ejection sensor
photo-receiving (PS13) and the mas-
ter ejection sensor photo-emitting
PCB?
Is trouble cleared by replacing the
master ejection sensor photo-receiv-
ing (PS13)?
Is trouble cleared by replacing the
master ejection sensor photo-emitting
PCB?
Does roll-up motor (M4) rotate nor-
mally?
Is the master clump section dirty with
ink or oil?
Is stripper finger or springs damaged?
Is the drum master ejection stop posi-
tion within reference value?
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Roll-up motor 1 YES Replace roll-up motor (M4).
Regulated power supply 2 NO Replace regulated power supply.
Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Does voltage between drive PCB unit
CN4-14 (+) and -13 (GND) show 24V
when roll-up motor (M4) is operated
with HELP mode (H-18)*?
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1
(GND) show 24V?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
HELP mode H-18 \ see p.258*
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 217/303220
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(14) "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed
(15) "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Paper sensor (MS7) 1 NO Adjust paper sensor (MS7)
position position.
Paper sensor (MS7) 2 NO Replace paper sensor (MS7).
Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is actuator for paper sensor (MS7) is
pressed when paper tray is set?
When paper sensor (MS7) is checkedwith volt-ohm-milliammeter, does it
CLOSE if actuator is pressed and
OPEN if released?
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Front cover SW (MS5)
1NO Adjust front cover SW (MS5)
position position.
Front cover SW (MS5) 2 NO Replace front cover SW (MS5).
Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is front cover SW (MS5) pressed
when front cover is set?
When front cover SW (MS5) is
checked with volt-ohm-milliammeter,
does it OPEN if switch is pressed
(front cover open) and CLOSE if
released (front cover close)?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 218/303221
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(16) "DOC. TRAY OPEN" is displayed
(17) "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed
HELP mode H-13 \ see p.252*
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Document receiving tray 1 NO Adjust the document receiving traySW (MS3) position. SW (MS3) position.
Document receiving tray 2 NO Replace the document receiving
SW (MS3) tray SW (MS3).
Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is the document receiving tray SW(MS3) pressed when document
receiving tray is closed?When the document receiving tray
SW (MS3) is checked with volt-ohm-
milliammeter, does it CLOSE if switch
is pressed and OPEN if released?
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Adjustment for the 1 YES Finish.
end mark sensor PCB
unit (PS3).
End mark sensor PCB 2 YES Finish.
unit (PS3)
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is trouble cleared by adjusting the
end mark sensor PCB unit (PS3) by
HELP mode (H-13)*?
Is trouble cleared by replacing the end
mark sensor PCB unit (PS3)?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 219/303222
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(18) "EXCHANGE INK" is displayed
HELP mode H-28 \ see p.267*
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Ink 1 NO Replace ink pack.
Setting method of ink 2 NO Set ink pack properly and teach
pack. user how to set one.
Main PCB unit 3 YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Ink detection PCB unit 4 YES Replace Ink detection PCB unit.
5 NO Proceed to procedure 7.
Foreign material in ink 6 YES Finish.
pump
Ink pump NO Replace ink pump.
Regulated power supply 7 NO Replace regulated power supply.
Ink motor (M2) 8 YES Replace ink motor (M2).
Drive PCB unit 9 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Is enough ink left in ink pack?
Is ink pack set properly?
Is LED on the ink detection PCB unit
lit?
Is enough ink left in drum? (Has ink
reached detection needle for the ink
detection PCB unit?)
Does ink pump operate?
Is trouble cleared by cleaning inside of
ink pump?
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN4-1 (+) and -1 (GND)
show 24V?
Does voltage between drive PCB unit
CN2-1 and -2 show 24V?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
(19) "SET KEYCARD" is displayed specification for export
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.
How to use. 2 YES Finish.
Keycard counter 3 NO Connect connector properly.
connector
HELP setting. 4 NO Set HELP mode (H-28)* set to
“***0”.
YES Proceed to procedure 6.
HELP setting. 5 NO Set HELP mode (H-28)* set to
“***1”.
Main PCB unit 6 YES Finish.
Keycard counter NO Replace keycard counter.
Is the keycard counter connector con-
nected?
Is trouble cleared by inserting depart-
ment card as keycard?
Is the keycard counter connector con-
nected properly?
Is HELP mode (H-28)* set to
“***0”?
Is HELP mode(H-28)* set to
“***1”?
Does voltage between main PCB unit
CN6-3 and GND about 5V?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 220/303223
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(20) "DOCUMENT JAM" is displayed, when power turned on
HELP mode H-08 \ see p.247*
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 NO Proceed to procedure 7.
Separator, paper feed 2 NO Clean separator and the paper
roller feed roller. If necessary, replace.
Main PCB unit 3 YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Main PCB unit 4 YES Replace main PCB unit.
Scanner JAM sensor 5 NO Replace the scanner JAM sensor.
Document position sensor 6 NO Replace the document position
sensor.
Gears 7 YES Replace gears.
Regulated power supply 8 NO Replace regulated power supply.
Drive PCB unit 9 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit 10 YES Finish.
Scanner stepping motor NO Replace scanner stepping motor
(PM1) (PM1).
Does the document feed roller rotate?
Is document fed by separator and the
paper feed roller?
When document sensor 1 (PS1) is
checked with HELP mode (H-08)*, is
0 displayed if sensor is photo passing
and is 1 displayed if photointerrupted?
Does voltage between main PCB unit
CN13-2 and GND show HIGH value
(about 4.5V) if sensor is photointer-
rupted and LOW if photo passing?
Does the sensor indicate "1" when
there is paper and "0" when there is
no paper?
Does the sensor indicate "10 or lower"
when there is paper and "255" when
there is no paper if it is checked by
HELP mode (H-08)*?
Are gears broken?
Does voltage between regulated
power supply CN4-4 (+) and -1 (GND)
show 24V?
Is trouble cleared by replacing drive
PCB unit?
Is trouble cleared by replacing mainPCB unit?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 221/303224
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(21) "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Paper 1 NO Use paper conforming to
specification.
2 YES Proceed to procedure 7.
Paper jammed 3 YES Refer to “(25) Paper JAM in
paper eject side”.
Master ejection box is 4 YES Finish.
not closed.
Dirt or foreign material 5 YES Clean the photo-emitting and
on sensor photo-receiving sections of JAM
sensor.
Sensor position 6 YES Finish.
JAM sensor 7 YES Replace JAM sensor photo-
photo-emitting PCB emitting PCB.
JAM sensor NO Replace JAM sensor photo-
photo-receiving PCB receiving PCB.
Stop/JAM detection 8 NO Adjust position of the stop/JAM
position sensor (PS6) detection position sensor. If
necessary, replace.
Main PCB unit YES Replace main PCB unit.
Is printing paper long within specified
value?
When JAM sensor 1 (PS12) ischecked with HELP mode (H-08)*, is
0 displayed if sensor is photopassing
and is 1 displayed if photointerrupted?
Is paper really jammed at master ejec-
tion section?
Is trouble cleared by properly closing
the master ejection box?
Is there any dirt or foreign material on
the JAM sensor photo-emitting or
photo-receiving section?
Is trouble cleared by adjusting the
JAM detection sensor position?
Is 0 displayed by directing another
light to the photo-receiving section of
the document sensor photo-receiving
PCB when JAM sensor 1 (PS12) is
checked with HELP mode (H-06)*?
When drum is checked with HELP
mode (H-06)* while rotating slowly,
does the stop/JAM detection position
sensor (PS6) display 0 or 1 according
to edge of photointerrupter?
\ see page 227
HELP mode H-06 \ see p.245*
HELP mode H-08 \ see p.247*
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 222/303225
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
(22) "PAPER LEFT JAM" is displayed
HELP mode H-06 \ see p.245*
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
1 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit 2 YES Replace the main PCB unit.
P roller sensor (PS9) 3 YES Finish.
position
P roller sensor (PS9) 4 YES Finish.
Main PCB unit NO Check the bundled wire and
connectors and replace the main
PCB unit.
Is trouble cleared by checking, refer-
ring to “(24) Paper jams in the paper
feed side”?
When P roller sensor (PS9) is
checked with HELP mode (H-06)*, is
0 displayed if press is turned ON and
1 displayed if OFF?
If no problem is detected by the
check with HELP mode (H-06)*,
result on printing may differ
depending on speed or load.
Recommended is to follow proce-
dure 3 and 4 below for further
check.Is the trouble cleared by adjusting P
roller sensor (PS9) position?
Is the trouble cleared by replacing P
roller sensor (PS9)?
NOTE:
\ see page 226
(23) "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" is displayed
Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure
Core 1 YES Insert new core.
Core full SW (MS8) 2 YES Adjust actuator of core full SW
actuator (MS8).
Core full SW (MS8) 3 NO Replace core full SW (MS8).
Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and
connectors and replace main
PCB unit.
Core is not included or core is full?
Is core full SW (MS8) pressed when
empty core is installed?
Does core full SW (MS8) tested volt-
ohm-milliammeter prove to be nor-
mal?
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 223/303226
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
Causes Symptoms Countermeasure
Printing paper not suit-
able
• If paper is too thick, it won’t be likely fed. If too thin, dou-
ble sheets may be fed.
• Paper not clearly cut: 2 sheets still adhere to each
other.
• Much paper scraps may deteriorate the paper feed
roller and separator performance.
Explain causes to user. Have user
change to the paper conforming to
specifications.
Dirt / foreign matter in
transfer path
• Paper gets stuck in transfer path, causing creasing and
tearing.
Remove any dirt or foreign matter.
Incorrect paper feed path
pressure
• If pressure on paper is insufficient, paper will not be fed.
• If pressure on paper is excessive, double sheets will be
fed.
Explain to users how to select cor-
rect pressure for paper.
Worn paper feed roller • Paper may not be fed. Replace paper feed roller.
Paper separator unit gap • If gap is too large, separator unit will rattle in direction of
paper transfer path, causing double sheets to be fed.
• If gap is too small, paper separator unit cannot follow
angle change due to paper feed shaft up-down move-
ment, which may cause double-sheet or slanted feed,
and creasing.
Perform paper separator unit gap
adjustment.
Paper separator unit • Wear, or adhesion of paper scraps causes deterioration
in separating performance, resulting in double-sheet
feed.
Clean separating surfaces. If any
trouble exists, replace. Perform sep-
arator unit gap adjustment on new
unit.
Separation pressure • If pressure is very low, no paper will be fed. Perform separation pressure adjust-
ment.
Paper tray upper position
limit
• Paper slant is large, causing creases.
• During printing, paper feed errors often occur immedi-
ately before or after paper tray rises.
Perform paper feed tray upper limit
sensor adjustment.
Paper feed amount • If amount is too short, paper slant cannot be corrected,
printing position may not be uniform, or paper may not
be fed.
• If amount is too long, loop becomes too large, causing
paper to buckle up between paper feed roller and timing
roller, resulting in feed error.
Perform paper feed amount adjust-
ment.
Paper feed clutch • Clutch slippage will reduce paper feed amount.
• If clutch does not disengage properly, the paper feed
segment gear will not return correctly, leading to
reduced feed amount.
(See “Paper feed amount” above.)
Replace paper feed cluch.
Guide roller pressure &
timing
• If Guide roller pressure is insufficient, paper will not be
gripped properly, and timing roller will not assure con-
stant feed amount. As a result, printing position will not
be uniform. In the worst case, no paper will reach drum.
• If there is a gap between Guide roller and the timing
roller, paper slant cannot be corrected.
Perform escape amount adjustment
and escape timing adjustment.
Timing roller • If the timing roller clutch slips, feed amount will not be
constant. As a result, printing position will not be uni-
form. In the worst case, no paper will reach drum.
• If the timing roller clutch does not disengage properly,
the paper feed segment gear will not return correctly,
leading to reduced and unstable feed amount. As a
result, printing position will not be uniform. In the worst
case, no paper will reach drum.
Clean timing roller clutch . Replace
if necessary.
Incorrect signal lever
operation
• Paper may be damaged in the part of leading edge that
touches the signal lever. In the worst case, paper may
stick to the signal lever.
Clean bearing unit. Check that signal
lever moves smoothly.
(24) Paper Jams in the Paper Feed Side
\ see page 171
\ see page 171
\ see page 172
\ see page 172
HELP mode H-67 / 291 page
\ see page 174
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 224/303227
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
Causes Symptoms Countermeasure
Printing paper not suit-
able
• If paper is too thin, it will stick to drum and scrunch up.
• If grain of paper is sideways relative to transfer direction, paper will
crunch up, or get jammed on the paper receiving plate.
• If paper curl upward, it will likely scrunch up. If curl downward, it will
likely get jammed on the paper receiving plate.
Explain causes to users. Have user
change to paper conforming to
specifications.
Image of document • If set-solid exists near leading edge of paper, paper will likely scrunch
up.
• If set-solid is blasted to one side of paper, paper will not be ejected in
a straight line. As a result, ejected paper will be disorderly piled and
likely jam on the paper receiving plate.
• Adjust leading edge margin to
about 10 mm. (Too long margin
will cause adverse results.)
• Explain causes to users. If possi-
ble, have user change position for
set-solid.
Static electricity • If ambient air is dry, static electricity may cause disordered piles or
scrunch-up of paper.
• Explain causes to users. Have user desist
from excessive use of A/C or heating.
• If possible, have user take anti-dryness
measures including humidifiers.
Leading edge margin • If leading edge margin is not correct, scrunch-up of paper will likely
result.
Scrunch-up of paper may also result if the margin is too long.
IMPORTANT:
Perform printing position sensors
adjustment.
Guide roller pressure &
timing
• If Guide roller pressure is insufficient, paper will not be gripped proper-
ly, causing less feed amount determined by timing roller, or disap-
pearance of leading edge margin. This results in the paper scrunch-
up.
Perform escape amount and escape
timing adjustments.
Timing roller clutch • Any slippage of the timing roller clutch will reduce feed amount and
eliminate leading edge margin. This results in the paper scrunch-up.
• If the timing roller clutch does not disengage properly, the timing roller
segment gear will not return correctly, causing reduction of feed
amount or disappearance of leading edge margin. As a result, paperwill scrunch up.
Clean timing roller clutch. Repair if
necessary.
Paper stripper finger • If timing is too low, or the gap between drum and the leading edge of
paper is too large, paper stripper finger will not enter into the gap,
causing the paper scrunch-up.
Perform paper stripper finger adjust-
ment.
Air • If sufficient air is not delivered from the tip of the paper stripper finger,
it will not lift the leading edge of paper off drum. Scrunch-up of paper
will result.
• Check if the hole in the fingers tipis blocked by foreign matter.
• Check pipes for kinks or discon-nections.
• Check valves and O-rings on theair pump.
Paper ejection belt • If the speed of the paper ejection belt, if cannot eject the paper onto
the paper receiving plate with sufficient force.
As a result, there will be paper jams in the vicinity of the dischargeport. (Sometimes the trailing edge of the paper gets caught in the jam-
ming sensor and a paper jamming error is displayed.)
If the belt is broken or stretched,
replace it.
Paper ejection fan unit • If the suction force of the fan drops, it will not be able to blow the
paper (which has risen clear of the ejection belt) onto the paper
receiving plate with be paper jams in the vicinity of the discharge port.
(Sometimes the trailing edge of the paper gets caught in the jamming
sensor and a paper jamming error is displayed.)
Clean the fan. If it still does not work
properly, replace it.
Ink • Too much ink transferred to paper will likely cause scrunch-up of
paper.
• Perform ink volume adjustment of drum.
• Explain user that ink transfer volume
increases immediately after paper scrunch-
up, and advise user to restart printing at
standard speed, then.
\ see page 182
\ see page 180
\ see page 174
\ see page 175
(25) Paper Jams in Paper Eject Side
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 225/303228
zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7
This machine has a self-diagnosis function. The
state of the machine is always checked with this
function and is displayed with code on the control
panel. The following are the code display, cause and
detection timing.
• While the LPU driving signal is lit, the LPU escape
sensor cannot detect the edge for 2 seconds.
• The regulated power supply is defective.
• The mini drive PCB is defective.• The guide roller driving motor is defective.
• The guide roller sensor(LPU escape timing) is
defective.
• The main PCB unit is defective.
E014
Code display Cause Detection timing
E001• The main motor (M1) is defective.• The main motor PCB Unit is defective.
• The main PCB Unit is defective.
• The encoder sensor (PS7) is defective.
• While the drum rotation signal is lit, the encoder sen-
sor (PS7) cannot detect the edge for 1 second.
E002
• The elevator motor (M2) is defective.
• The elevator top limit sensor (PS9) is defective.
• The elevator bottom limit switch (MS6) is defective.
• The drive PCB is defective.
- The main PCB Unit is defective.
• The elevator operation is defective.
• The elevator does not reach the top limit for 30 sec-
onds after the elevator motor (M2) up signal is lit.
• The elevator does not reach the bottom limit for 30
seconds after the elevator motor (M2) down signal
is lit.
E004
• The lamp is defective.
• The invertor unit is defective.• The CCD is defective.
• Main PCB unit is defective.
• In the lamp lighting check, amount of light received
by CCD does not reach regulation value. (Performthe lamp lighting check once only, with the power
turned on.)
E008• The I/F PCB unit is defective.
• IPC I/F PCB unit is defective.
• During on-line platemaking, communication error
occurs between main PCB unit and I/F PCB unit.
E009• The regulated power supply is defective.
• The thermal head PCB is defective.
• The thermal head is defective.
• At start of platemaking, thermal head drive voltage
does not reach regulation value.
xError Display
Code display
LCD panel
E 1 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 226/303229
Chapter 8 HELP Mode
Pz HELP Mode List .........................................................230
x Overview ....................................................................234
c HELP Mode Functions and
Operation Procedures .............................235
(1) Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes ......235
(2) Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions................235¡HELP Mode Descriptions.....................................236
8
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 227/303230
z Help mode Listchap.8
z HELP Mode List
HELPMode No.
Description Classification Page
H-00(1) Display of ROM versions
(2) ROM version upgrading
ROM version
displays/upgrading
(1) 236
(2) 237
H-01(1) Display and adjustment of print speeds(2) Initialization of print speeds(3) Function testing of paper feed clutch
Adjustmentt /specificationsettingFunction testing
(1) 238(2) 239
(3) 240
H-02 (1) Function testing of elevator motor Function testing 241
H-03 (1) Function testing of TAPE CLUSTER Function testing 242
H-04 (1) Function testing of ink replenishment Function testing 243
H-05
(1) Checking of condition of master ejection sensor and other sensors
listed below¡Master ejection sensor¡Paper feed sensor¡Top/Bottom limit sensor, Top/Bottom center sensor
¡ADF cover switch, Feed tray descend switch, Jog switch (drum
rotation switch), Master cover switch, Master lever switch, Elevator
lower limit switch, Paper sensor, Drum cover switch
Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
244
H-06
(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡Drum master attachment /detachment position sensor ,
Paper ejection jam sensor , Drum stop/paper ejection jamPaper sensing position sensor, Press roll sensor
¡Encoder sensor , Elevator top limit sensor, A/C mode sensor,B mode sensor
Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
245
H-07
(1) Checking of condition of switches listed below:Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
246
H-08(1) Checking of condition of sensors/swtches listed below:
¡Document sensor, Scanner JAM sensor, Document position sensor¡Drum switch, Master roll Full switch, Top cover open/closed detection switch
Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
247
H-09(1) Checking of master attachment position, jam sensing position,
master detachment position and drum stop positionFunction testing 248
H-10(1) Function testing of lamp
(2) Function testing of ADF clutchesFunction testing
(1)249
(1)252
(2)249
(2)253
H-11(1) Display of document darkness values / scanner test
(for use in factory checks)Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
250
H-12 (1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head and main PCB unitsynchronized signals
Function testing
Function testing
251
H-13(1) Check the condition of the end mark sensor and master position
sensor
(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch
Sensor/switch conditiondisplay
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 228/303231
z Help mode Listchap.8
HELPMode No.
Description Classification Page
H-14
(1) Platemaking total counter display
(2) Resetting of count of total plates made in user mode Total counts
(1) 254
(2) 254
H-20(1) Function testing of clump motor and clump position sensing
(A/B /C mode position)Function testing 260
H-23 (1) Setting of photograph mode document sensing darknessAdjustment/specificationsetting
262
H-24 (1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinal R / E of scannerAdjustment/specificationsetting
263
H-25 (1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinal R / E of scanner Adjustment/specificationsetting 264
H-26(1) Compensation of document darkness white level in photograph
modeAdjustment/specificationsetting
265
H-27 (1) Initialization of all HELP mode settingsAdjustment/specificationsetting
266
H-28(1) Setting : TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence
Buzzer selection
KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification
Adjustment/specificationsetting
267
H-29 (1) Adjustment of paper infeed amountAdjustment/specificationsetting
268
H-30(1) Test pattern (all shading sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)
platemaking and printing Function testing 269
H-31 (1) Setting of number of pre-print sheetsAdjustment/specificationsetting
270
H-32(1) Setting : Confidential safeguard function
First print speed
Master ejection error sensing
Adjustment/specificationsetting
271
H-33 (1) Compensation of document darkness white level in text modeAdjustment/specificationsetting
272
4
Function testing
4H-21 (Not used)
H-22(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amount for
platemaking sideAdjustment/specificationsetting
261
H-19(1) Printing total counter display
(2) Resetting of count of total sheets printed in user modeTotal counts (1) 259
(2) 259
H-18 (1) Function testing of roll-up motor Function testing 258
H-17 (1) Function testing of cutter motor
H-16 (1) Correction of platemaking start position during online platemakingAdjustment /specificationsetting
256
257
H-15 (1) Function testing of ink motor Function testing 255
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 229/303232
z Help mode Listchap.8
HELPMode No.
Description Classification Page
H-40(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner is used
Setting of platemaking area (sub-scanning direction)
H-41(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting
Setting of repeat count displayAdjustment/specification
setting
Adjustment/specification
setting
277
H-45 (Not used)
H-46 (Not used)
H-47 (Not used)
H-48 (Not used)
H-49 (Not used)
H-50 (1) Setting of text mode document sensing darknessAdjustment/specification
setting281
H-51 (1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemakingAdjustment/specification
setting282
H-52 (1) Setting of online conditionsAdjustment/specificationsetting
283
H-53(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side) platemaking start position
for online platemakingAdjustment/specification
setting285
H-42(1) Setting of paper selection specification
Setting of platemaking area (main-scanning direction)Adjustment/specification
setting278
280
H-43
Adjustment/specification
setting
Adjustment/specification
setting
H-44 (1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking
(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy
H-37 (1) Adjustment of platemaking start position when scanner is usedAdjustment/specification
setting275
276
279
H-39 (Not used) 4 4
4 4
4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
H-38 (Not used) 4 4
H-34 (Not used) 4 4
H-35 (1) Adjustment of scanner leading edge sensing positionAdjustment/specification
setting273
H-36 (1) Adjustment of scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing positionAdjustment/specification
setting274
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 230/303233
z Help mode Listchap.8
HELPMode No.
Description Classification Page
H-60 (Not used)
(Not used)
H-61 (1) Selection of LCD specificationAdjustment/specificationsetting
288
H-62
H-63 (Not used)
H-64 (1) Buzzer (tone) settingAdjustment/specification
Setting289
H-66(1) Setting : Clump opening/closing timing of when a master is attached
Loop sensor ON/OFF
Paper size mode (long size)
Adjustment/specification
Setting290
4
H-56 (1) Setting for selecting manipulation language
H-57 (1) Setting of online conditionsAdjustment/specification
Setting283
H-58 (Not used) 4 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
44
44
4
H-59 (Not used)
H-54 (Not used)
H-55
(1) Setting : Ink check at printing start
Cutting operation mode for master cuttingInterlocks
Adjustment/specification
Setting
Adjustment/specification
Setting
286
287
4 4
H-71 (Not used)
44(Not used)
44(Not used)
44(Not used)
44(Not used)
H-72
H-70 (1) Option setting 1
Adjustment/specification
Setting 294
H-73
H-74
H-75
H-76 (1) Document darkness correction for text/photograph modeAdjustment/specification
Setting295
H-68 (1) Setting of paper feed timing
H-69 (1) Setting of modelAdjustment/specification
Setting293
H-67 (1) Setting of paper feed lengthAdjustment/specification
Setting
Adjustment/specification
Setting
291
292
H-65 (Not used)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 231/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 232/303235
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
c HELP Mode Functions and Operation Procedures
(1) Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes
(2) Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions
q During use of the DUPRINTER: first put the machine into the
standby state, then turn the Power switch OFF.
wSimultaneously press and hold down the and PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys, and turn the Power switch ON with
those keys held down. After about 2 seconds, a beep-beep-beep
tone will sound, and the HELP mode display will appear.
eUsing the numeric keys, enter the number of the HELP mode you
want to access.
Example: To access HELP mode H-00, enter [0], [0].
¡Alternatively, the and PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
keys may be used to select the HELP mode number.
rPress the PRINT key. The HELP mode specified ine will be
accessed, and either the initial value (value set at factory), or the
currently set value, for the mode will be displayed.
From this point on, follow the procedure given below for the
particular mode accessed.
The descriptions of each HELP mode given on the following pages
are laid out as follows:
HELP mode number
References
to related
pages
LC displayfor function
Operation
procedure for
individual
functions
Main functions
NOTE :
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.7
1. Functions
(1) Tape cluster function test
(1) Testing the tape cluster's functioning
q Access HELP mode H-03, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the TEST PRINT key. The tape feed motor
will run, and feed out the tape, for as long as the key is held down.
T
2. Operation procedure
H-03 (1)Function testingHELP mode
H - 0 3
Mode number flashes
\See page 293
For removal
For desccription of operation
\See page 150
\See page 195
(2) Stacker rise/descent motor function testing
Function category
H E L P S E L E C T 0 0
Mode number flashes
V 1 . 1 1 O P 1 V 1 . 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 233/303236
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Display of ROM versions¡ Displays version of the main PCB unit's ROM (U12).
¡ Displays version of the I/F PCB unit.
¡ROM version for I/F PCB unit is displayed only when connected with
the computer.
(2) ROM version upgrading¡
Allows upgrading of the main PCB unit's ROM (U12).
(1) Displaying ROM versions
q Access HELP mode H-00, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
Displays version of the ROM.
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedure
H-00 (1) ROM version displaysHELP mode
Main PCB unit
¡ HELP Mode Descriptions
IMPORTANT :
¡Displaying ROM version
I/F PCB unit
V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 234/303237
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
uPress the PRINT key.Copying will begin, and the message "---COPYING---" will appear in
the LCD panel. Copying takes about 40 seconds. When it is
complete, the new ROM version will be displayed.
¡DO not turn off the power while "---COPYING- --" is displayed. If you do
you will have to repeat the copying operation from the beginning.
IMPORTANT :
(2) Upgrading of ROM version
qDuring use of the DUPRINTER: first put the machine into the
standby state, then turn the Power switch OFF.
wSwitch on only No.1 of SW1 on the main PCB unit.
¡Never turn on No.2 through No.4 of SW1.
eInsert a master ROM into the socket of the main PCB unit's U12
ROM.
IMPORTANT :
rSimultaneously press and hold down the and PRINTING
SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys, and turn the Power switch ON with
those keys held down.
tPress the [0] numeric key twice (to access HELP mode H-00).
yPress the PRINT key.
H-00 (2) ROM version upgradingHELP mode
iTurn the Power switch OFF.
oRemove the master ROM from the socket of the main PCB unit's
U12 ROM.
!0Set switch No. 1 of the SW1 switches to OFF.
Mode number flashes
ROM version is displayed
Upgraded version isdisplayed
¡Main PCB unit
Turn No. 1 of SW1 from OFF to ON
Insert master ROM
Turn No. 1 of SW1 from ON to OFF
Remove master ROM
H E L P S E L E C T 0 0
- - - C O P Y I N G - - -
V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1
V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 235/303238
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Display and adjustment of print speeds¡Display and adjustment of print speeds (pre-stop speed, jog speed
and speeds 1-3)
* The pre-stop speed is adjusted by means of the main motor PCB
unit's variable resistor (VR).
H-01 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
Adjusting of Printing Speeds 1-3
\See page 192
Pre-stop Speeds Adjustment
\See page 191
¡ Jog speedPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.
¡ Pre-stop speed
Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.
eSelect the item speed you want to adjust¡ To select the print speed:
Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.
(1) Adjusting speeds and memorizing the adjusted values
q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wSelect the speed you want to adjust.
¡ Speeds 1-3Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the TEXT item. Then use the and
PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys to select one of speeds 1
through 3.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedure
STD
1st 2nd 3rd speed
(2) Initialization of print speeds
1 1 1 r p m
For electrical parts layout
\See page 298
(3) Paper feed clutch function testing
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 236/303
(2) Initializing speed settings (returning settings to the
default settings prior to adjustment at factory)
After initialization, the speeds must be readjusted.
q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress the [=] and CLEAR keys. The settings will be
initialized.
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
C
\See page 235
239
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-01 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
rUse the FUNCTION SWITCH key and SELECT key to
adjust the speed value.
Speed
Pre-stop
JOG
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
* The print speed's pre-stop speed and JOG speed are adjusted by means of
the main motor PCB unit's variable resistor (VR), not using the FUNCTION
SWITCH and SELECT keys.
Adjustment standard (rpm)Print speed
(4 – 6*)
16
60
78 – 82
120
tTo display or adjust other another speed(s), repeat stepswthroughr.
yPress the STOP key. The newly adjusted value(s) will be
memorized, and the HELP mode selection display will reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
\See page 191
Mode number flashes
H E L P S E L E C T 0 1
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 237/303240
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-01 (3) Function testingHELP mode
(3) Testing the paper feed clutch's functioning
¡Call HELP mode (H-02) in advance, set the Paper tray to the upper
most position by keep pressing the FUNCTION SWITCH key.
q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
The drum rotates.
wPress the TEST PRINT key.
Proceed with the paper feed operation.
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
T
\See page 235
IMPORTANT :
\See page (H-02 qwe )
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 238/303241
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
H-02 (1) Function testingHELP mode
2. Operation procedure
For electrical parts layout
\See page 300
(1) Elevator motor function testing
(1) Testing the elevator motor's functioning
q Access HELP mode H-02, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The
elevator motor will run, making the paper tray rise, for as long as
the key is held down.
eTo stop the elevator motor, either release the FUNCTION SWITCH
key, or de-obstruct the elevator upper limit sensor's light
beam.
rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The elevator motor will
run, making the paper tray descend, for as long as the key is held
down.
tTo stop the elevator motor, either release the SELECT key, or
alter the elevator lower limit switch's condition from closed to
open.
yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
\See page 235
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 239/303242
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Tape cluster function test
(1) Testing the tape cluster's functioning
q Access HELP mode H-03, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the TEST PRINT key. The tape feed motor
will run, and feed out the tape, for as long as the key is held down.
eRelease the TEST PRINT key. The tape cutting solenoid will
be activated, and the tape will be cut.
T
T
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedure
H-03 (1)Function testingHELP mode
For description of operation
\See page 119
: T A P E T E S T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 240/303243
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Ink replenishment function testing¡Tests functioning of ink replenishment by sensing the ink
supplied.
(1) Testing the functioning of ink replenishment
q Access HELP mode H-04, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the drum will rotate, and the
ink pump run, until the ink sensing PCB unit's LED lamp lights to
signal that ink supply is OK. When this lamp lights, a buzzer
sounds and the drum and ink pump stop.
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedure
H-04 (1) Function testingHELP mode
: I N K C H E C K
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 241/303244
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
eRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of
the following sensors will appear.
x Paper feed sensor : A
x Top/bottom limit sensor : C
x Top/bottom center sensor : D
1. Functions
(1) Checking of condition of master ejection sensor andother sensors listed below¡ Displays amount of light received by master ejection sensor.
¡ Runs checks on the paper feed sensor and the top/bottom limit,
top/bottom center sensors.
(1) Checking the condition of master ejection sensor
and other listed sensorsq Access HELP mode H-05, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the PRINT key. For as long as the key is
held down, the master ejection sensor's photo-receiving amount
will be displayed, as a value between 00 and 63.
x Reading the displayed value
¡ [00] : Maximum amount of light received
¡ [63] : No light received
¡ [00 displayed value 45] : No master between sensor
components
* Displayed value when master present > Displayed value when
master absent
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedure
H-05 (1) Sensor / switch condition displayHELP mode
Amount of light received bymaster ejection sensor
Top/bottom limit sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Top/bottom center sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Not used
For electrical parts layout
\See page 299
Master ejection sensor
\See page 77
Paper feed sensor1=paper present
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 242/303245
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡ Runs checks on the drum master attachment/detachment
position sensor, light reception by the paper ejection jam sensor,
drum stop / paper ejection jam sensing position sensor, and press
roller sensor.
¡ Runs checks on encoders, elevator top limit sensor, A/C mode
sensor and B mode sensor.
¡ Displays amount of light received by paper ejection jam sensor.
(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors
q Access HELP mode H-06, and press the PRINT key.
wRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of
the following sensors will appear.
x Press roller sensor : A
x Drum stop / paper ejection jam sensing position sensor : B
x Light reception by the paper ejection jam sensor : C
x Drum master attachment/detachment position sensor : D
ePress the PRINT key once more. For as long as the key is held
down, a display indicating the conditions of the following sensors
will appear.
x B mode sensor : A
x A/C mode sensor : B
x Elevator top limit sensor : C
x Encoder checks : D
rPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.
The paper ejection jam sensor's photo-receiving amount will be
displayed, as a value between 000 and 255.
x Paper ejection jam sensor
¡ [10] and under : Paper present
¡ [255] : Paper absent
tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedure
H-06 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode
Drum master attachment / position sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Light reception by the paperejection jam sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Drum stop / paper ejection jamsensing position sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Press roller sensor1 = light beam obstructed
Encoder check 0 or 1(switches between 0 and 1 each time8 edges are sensed)
Elevator top limit sensor1 = light beam obstructed
A/C mode sensor
1 = light beam obstructed
B mode sensor1 = light beam obstructed
For electrical parts layout
\See page 299
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Amount of light received bypaper ejection jam sensor
1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 243/303246
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Checking of condition of switches listed below:¡Displays condition of master cover opening/closing switch, drum
rotation switch, feed tray descend switch, elevator lower limit
switch and ADF cover opening/closing switch as 0 or 1.
¡Displays condition of drum cover switch, paper sensor, elevator
lower limit switch, and master lever switch as 0 or 1.
(1) Checking the condition of the listed switches
q Access HELP mode H-07, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold the PRINT key. For as long as the key is held
down, a display indicating the conditions of the following switches
will appear.
S ADF cover opening/closing switch : A
S Feed tray descend switch : B
S Drum rotation switch : C
S Master cover opening/closing switch : D
\See page 235
eRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of
the following switches will appear.
S Master lever switch : A
S Elevator lower limit switch : B
S Paper sensor : C
S Drum cover switch : D
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedure
H-07 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode
Drum cover switch 0 = open
Paper sensor 1=paper present
Elevator lower limit switch 1=push
Master lever switch1 = PUSH
Master cover opening/closing switch 1=open
Drum rotation switch 1 = PUSH
Feed ray descend switch 1 = PUSH
ADF cover opening/closingswitch 1=open
For electrical parts layout
\See page 298
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 244/303247
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors
q Access HELP mode H-08, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the TEXT item.
ePress and hold down the PRINT key. For as long as the key is
held down, a display indicating the conditions of the following sensors will appear.
S Document sensor : A
S Scanner jam sensor : B
S Document position sensor : C
Document position sensor's photo-receiving amount will be
displayed, as a value between 000 and 255.
x Paper ejection jam sensor
¡ [10] and under : Document present
¡ [255] : Document absent
\See page 235
1. Functions
(1 ) Checking of condition of sensors and switcheslisted below:
¡Displays amount of light received by document position sensor
and displays condition of scanner jam sensor, and document
sensor as 0 or 1.
¡Displays condition of drum presence switch, master roll FULL
switch, and ADF cover open/closed detection switch, as 0 or 1.
tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedure
H-08 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode
Drum switch 1 = drum present
Not used
Paper roll FULL switch 1 = PUSH
Top cover open/closeddetection switch
1=ADF cover open
For electrical parts layout
\See page 298, 299
A :1
B :1
C :1
D :1
rRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of
the following sensors will appear.
S Top cover open/closed detection switch : A
S Paper roll FULL switch : B
S Drum switch : D
Amount of light received bydocument position sensor
Scanner jam sensor 1 = jamming
Document sensor1=paper absent
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 245/303248
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
(1) Checking the master attachment, jam sensing,
master position and drum stop positions
q Access HELP mode H-09, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡Each time the PRINT key is pressed, the drum stop and jam
sensing position sensors, and the master attachment/detachment
positions sensors, will alternately sense the edge of the shade
plate, then stop.
\See page 235
1. Functions
(1) Checking of master attachment position, jamsensing position, master detachment position and
drum stop position
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedures
H-09 (1) Function testingHELP mode
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 177
: D R UM P O S . T E S T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 246/303249
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
(1) Testing the functioning of lamp (on/off)
q Access HELP mode H-10, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the indicators will light.
\See page 235
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
1. Functions
(1) Testing of functioning of lamp (on/off)(2) Testing of functioning of ADF clutches function
2. Operation procedures
H-10 (1), (2) Function testingHELP mode
: C C D T E S T
(2) Testing of functioning of ADF clutches function
q Access HELP mode H-10, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wSelect clutch A or B.
¡ Clutch A
Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key and set to
"TEXT".
¡ Clutch BPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key and set to
"TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH".
ePress the TEST PRINT key.
The clutch selected in Step 2) turns "ON".
rTo check the operation of the other clutch, proceed with Steps w)
ande).
T
\See page 235
tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 247/303250
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.
¡Display of darkness value for lightest part of document
a Use the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select theTEXT item.
A value between 000 ("darkest" value) and 255 ("lightest" value)
will be displayed.
¡Display of darkness value for darkest part of document
(relative to lightest part, above)
a Use the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the
PHOTOGRAPH item.
A value between 000 ("darkest" value) and 255 ("lightest" value)
will be displayed.
1. Functions
(1) Document darkness values and scanner test (for usein factory checks)
(1) Document darkness values and scanner test (for use
in factory checks)
q Access HELP mode H-11, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡ When the PRINT key is pressed, the lamp lights up and the
document is conveyed to the "position for sensing document
size". The sensed size is displayed as a 3-digit number ( 1 1 1 )
and the document is fed out.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedures
H-11 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode
Sensed size display
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
1 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 248/303251
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Check that the increment of both digits occurs at a rate of
approximately 1 second per implement, so that over a period of 10
second, there is no marked difference between the two values. A
marked difference indicates abnormality.
¡ Check of thermal head and main PCB unit synchronized signals
a Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.
Two digits will be displayed. The first digit represents a count
based on the thermal head synchronized signal, and the second a
count based on the main PCB unit's start signal. These counts rise
from 0 up to 7, in increments of 1. The increments occur at
intervals of approximately 1 second.
Main PCB unit start signal
Thermal headsynchronized signal
1. Functions
(1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head andmain PCB unit synchronized signals
(1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head and
main PCB unit synchronized signals
q Access HELP mode H-12, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.
¡ Check of shading memory, and display of result
a Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as
needed to select the TEXT item.
An "FFFF" result display indicates the memory is normal. Anyother display indicates abnormality.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedures
H-12 (1) Function testingHELP mode
¡ Display during check
¡ Check result display
0 0
F F F F
1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 249/303252
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡ Display of amount of light received by end mark sensor and
master position sensor.
(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch
(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors
q Access HELP mode H-13, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235
SMaster position sensor
aTo access this display, press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH
key as many times as needed to select the TEXT item.
¡Display of presence/absence of the master on its travel path, as
a numerical value.
" 0": Master present
"63": Master absent
2. Operation procedures
H-13 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode
End mark sensor
\See page 70
Amount of light received byend mark sensor
1 1
Amount of light received bymaster position sensor
1 1
S End mark sensor
¡To access this display, press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH
key as many times as needed to select the
TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.
¡Display of presence/absence of the master on its travel path, as
a numerical value.
<Sensitivity adjustment of the end mark sensor>
Adjust the sensitivity using the FUNCTION SWITCH key
and SELECT key.
Set the black level to "MAX-10".
Make sure that the difference between black and white is "30"
or larger.
wSelect the sensor below and follow the procedure accordingly.
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Master position sensor
\See page 72
Master feeding clutch
\See page 74
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 250/303253
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-13 (2) Function testingHELP mode
(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch
q Access HELP mode H-13, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡Press the TEST PRINT key. turns "ON" the master feeding
clutch once.
T
\See page 235
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 251/303254
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
(1) Platemaking total counter display
q Access HELP mode H-14, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the total number of
platemaking is displayed.
\See page 235
1. Functions
(1) Platemaking total counter display(2) Resetting of count of total plates made in user mode
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedures
H-14 (1),(2) Total countsHELP mode
[F] = platemaking
Platemaking total counter
(2) Resetting the count of total plates made in user mode
q Access HELP mode H-14, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the current value for the
count of total plates made in user mode will be displayed.
wPress the [=] key and CLEAR keys simultaneously, toexecute resetting. The resetting will be memorized in the battery
PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization, "SAVE" will be
displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
C
\See page 235
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-19 \See page 259
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 252/303255
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Function testing of ink motor
1) Testing the functioning of the ink motor
q Access HELP mode H-15, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold the TEST PRINT key. The ink motor will run
for as long as the key is held down.
¡ Remember that ink will be delivered when the ink motor runs.
Take any precautions necessary.
T
\See page 235
eRelease the TEST PRINT key. The ink motor will stop.T
2. Operation procedures
H-15 (1) Function testingHELP mode
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
: I N K M T R . T E S T
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 253/303
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
256
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Rises by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
1***Lowers by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
Correction amount display
(1) Correction of platemaking start position duringonline platemaking
(1) Setting correction of platemaking start position
during online platemaking
q Access HELP mode H-16, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedures
H-16 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 188
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-37 \See page 275
HELP mode H-52,H-57 \See page 283
HELP mode H-53 \See page 285
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 254/303257
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
H-17 (1) Function testingHELP mode
2. Operation procedure
For electrical parts layout
\See page 300
(1) Cutter motor function testing
(1) Testing the cutter motor's functioning
q Access HELP mode H-17, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The cutter
motor will run for as long as the key is held down.
eTo stop the cutter motor, either release the FUNCTION SWITCH
key, or alter the cutter limit switch's condition from off to on.
rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The cutter motor will
run for as long as the key is held down.
tTo stop the cutter motor, either release the SELECT key, or
alter the cutter limit switch's condition off to on.
yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
\See page 235
After executing the cutter motor test, be sure to return the cutter
blade to the original position (operation side).
: C U T M T R . T E S T
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 255/303258
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Function testing of roll-up motor
(1) Testing the functioning of the roll-up motor
q Access HELP mode H-18, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The take-up
motor will rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise), so that
the roller inside the master ejection box turns, for as long as the
key is held down.
eTo stop the motor (and the roller), release the FUNCTION SWITCH
key.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedures
H-18 (1) Function testingHELP mode
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For description of operation
\See page 77
: E J E C T M . T E S T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 256/303259
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
(2) Resetting the count of total sheets printed in user mode
q Access HELP mode H-19, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the current value for the
count of total sheets printed in user mode will be displayed.
\See page 235
During memorization:
1. Functions
(1) Printing total counter display(2) Resetting of count of total sheets printed in user
mode
H-19 (1),(2) Total countsHELP mode
2. Operation procedures
(1) 7-digit display of count of total sheets printed
q Access HELP mode H-19, and press the PRINT key.For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235
"P"=Print
wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the total number of print is
displayed.
Printing total counter
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
wPress the [=] key and CLEAR keys keys simultaneously,
to execute resetting. The resetting will be memorized in the
battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization, "SAVE" will
be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
C
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
P . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-14 \See page 254
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 257/303260
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
¡Whether the clump is in the A, B or C mode position is determined by the B mode sensor and the A/C mode
sensor in combination:
A mode position : When the light beam of both the B mode and A/C mode sensor is unobstructed.
C mode position : When the light beam of both the B mode sensor is obstructed and that of the A/C mode
sensor unobstructed.
B mode position : When the B mode sensor senses edge, and the light beam of the A/C mode sensor is
obstructed.
¡If the clump is not in the A mode position when the power is turned on, it will rotate to the B position and stop
there.
wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The clump
motor will rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise), opening out
the clump, for as long as the key is held down.
eTo stop opening of the clump, release the FUNCTION SWITCH
key. (Alternatively, opening will stop automatically when the light
beam of the A/C mode sensor (PS3) is restored).
rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The clump motor will
rotate in the regular direction (clockwise), closing the clump, for as
long as the key is held down.
tTo stop closing of the clump, release the SELECT key.
(Alternatively, closing will stop automatically when the light beam of
the A/C mode sensor (PS3) is restored).
1. Functions
(1) Function testing of clump motor and clump positionsensing (A/B/C mode position)
(1) Testing the functioning of the clump motor andclump position sensing (A/B/C mode position)
q Access HELP mode H-20, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235
yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
2. Operation procedures
H-20 (1) Function testingHELP mode
NOTE :
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 167
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 169
B mode
A/C mode
For description of operation
\See page 80
: C L A M P M . T E S T
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 258/303261
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-22 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amountfor platemaking side
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***Sign flag
Shortens by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits.
1***Lengthens by the set amount for
the lower 3 digits.
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amount
for platemaking side
q Access HELP mode H-22, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
1 rank: 0.125%
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 186
Mode H-21 is not used
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 259/303262
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-23 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of photograph mode document sensingdarkness
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting of photograph mode document sensing
darkness
q Access HELP mode H-23, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 190
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-50 \See page 281
1 rank: 0.125%
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Shortens by the set amount for thelower 3 digits.
1***Lengthens by the set amount for
the lower 3 digits.
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 260/303263
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-24 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinalR/E scanner
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
0001
0010
0011
•
•
•
•
•
1111
•If help mode H-24 setting is
required, HELP mode H-25
must be set to "0000".
(1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinalR/E scanner
q Access HELP mode H-24, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
1 rank: 0.25%
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 186
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-25 \See page 264
During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 261/303264
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-25 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinalR/E of scanner
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
0001
0010
0011
•
•
•
•
•
1111
•If help mode H-25 setting is
required, HELP mode H-24
must be set to "0000".
(1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinal
R/E of scanner
q Access HELP mode H-25, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 186
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-24 \See page 263
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 262/303265
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-26 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Compensation of document darkness white level inphotograph mode
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Rises by the set amount for thelower 3 digits
1***Lowers by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
(1) Compensation of document darkness white level in
photograph mode
q Access HELP mode H-26, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 189
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-33 \See page 272
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 263/303266
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-27 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Initialization of all HELP mode settings
(1) Initializing all the HELP mode settings
q Access HELP mode H-27, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wPress the [=] key. The adjustment and specification settings
of the HELP modes will be initialized. (But for the total counts (H-
14 and H-19), only the user mode values will be initialized.) While
initialization is in progress, "SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
\See page 235
¡ For the values after initialization, see the initialization values for
each mode, and the HELP decals (on the inside of the front
cover).
¡ After initialization, carry out the adjustment and specification
setting operations for the various modes. Inappropriate settings
will results in operational problems.
2. Operation procedures
IMPORTANT :
ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
IMPORTANT :
: I N I T I A L I Z E
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 264/303267
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-28 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence, buzzerselection and KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0*** Whether there is aTAPE CLUSTER or not.
There is a TAPE CLUSTER.
1*** There is not a TAPE CLUSTER.
*00*
Selecting buzzer.
Standard (Buzzer sounds)
*01*Buzzer does not sound when trou-
ble occurs.
*10* Does not sound
*11* Does not sound
***0 KEYCARD COUNTER 2
specifications
KEYCARD COUNTER 2
***1 No KEYCARD COUNTER 2
1001 Initial value
(1) Setting of TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence, buzzer
selection and KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification
q Access HELP mode H-28, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
TAPE CLUSTER
\See page 119
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 265/303
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 266/303269
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
1. Functions
(1) Test pattern (all shading, sub-scanning directionzoom factor adjustment) platemaking and printing
(1) Test pattern (all shading, poor image area checking,
sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)
platemaking and printing
q Access HELP mode H-30, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.
¡ Test pattern 1 (all shading)aUse the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the
PHOTOGRAPH item.
¡Test pattern 3 (sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)
aUse the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the
TEXT item.
\See page 235
2. Operation procedures
H-30 (1) Function checkingHELP mode
¡Test pattern 1
¡Test pattern 3
Once this mode has been entered, it is not possible to switch to
any other mode. To exit this mode, turn off the power.
IMPORTANT :
For adjusting reduction / enlargement
\See page 186
ePress the PLATEMAKING key to implement platemaking/printing.
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
0 s h t 1 s e t
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 267/303270
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-31 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of number of pre-print sheets¡Use this to set a value for the number of pre-print sheets.
"Pre-print sheets" are extra sheets that are printed at the start
of printing, without being added to the print count.
2. Operation procedures
ABCD
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
ABCD
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Item
8 sheets
9 sheets
10 sheets
11 sheets
12 sheets
13 sheets
14 sheets
15 sheets
Item
0 sheet(initial value)
1 sheet
2 sheets
3 sheets
4 sheets
5 sheets
6 sheets
7 sheets
(1) Setting of number of pre-print sheets
q Access HELP mode H-31, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode numberusing the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 268/303271
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-32 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Confidential safeguard function, selection of firstprint speed, setting of master ejection error sensing
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0*** Not set
Set1***
*0** 1st-speed (about 45 rpm)
*1** JOG speed (about 15 rpm)
**0* Yes
**1* No
***0Not used.
***1
1000 Initial value
Confidential safeguardfunction
Selecting the first print
speed. /Selecting the print
speed for the first sheet
after plate making is com-
pleted.
Master mis-ejection detec-
tion
(1) Confidential safeguard function, selection of first
print speed, setting of master ejection error sensing
q Access HELP mode H-32, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 269/303272
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-33 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Compensation of document darkness white level intext mode
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Rises by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
1***Lowers by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
(1) Compensation of document darkness white level intext mode
q Access HELP mode H-33, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 189
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-26 \See page 265
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount displaySign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 270/303273
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-35 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
Mode H-34 is not used
(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Moves to the left by the set
amount of the lower 3 digits.
1***Moves to the right by the set
amount of the lower 3 digits.
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment
q Access HELP mode H-35, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 187
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-36 \See page 274
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 271/303274
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-36 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing positionadjustment
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Moves toward you by the setamount of the lower 3 digits.
1***Moves backward by the set
amount of the lower 3 digits.
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
***1
*111
(1) Scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing position
adjustment
q Access HELP mode H-36, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 187
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-35 \See page 273
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 272/303275
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-37 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Adjustment of platemaking start position whenscanner is used
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Rises by the set amount for thelower 3 digits
1***Lowers by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
(1) Adjustment of platemaking start position when
scanner is used
q Access HELP mode H-37, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 188
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-16 \See page 256
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 273/303276
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-40 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner isused, setting platemaking area (sub-scanning
direction)
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
1*** 350mm
**00 Normal
**01
**10
0000
Dark
Light
Platemaking area
(Sub-scanning direction)
Photograph mode
Initial value
Selected document size
(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner is
used,setting platemaking area (sub-scanningdirection)
q Access HELP mode H-40, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 188
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-16 \See page 256
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Modes H-38,H-39 are not used.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 274/303277
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-41 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting,setting of repeat count display
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0*** No automatic iniialization
1*** Initialized in about 2 minutes
*0**Not used
*1**
**0*Count repeat display
Repeat display of count
**1* No repeat display of count
1000 Initial value
Automatic initialization of
the control panel setting
(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting,
setting of repeat count display
q Access HELP mode H-41, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 275/303278
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-42 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of paper selection specification, settingplatemaking area (main-scanning direction)
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
00** B4/A4/B5/A5
10**
*1**
*0**
10914/LT•LG/ST/POST
**00
Paper selecting with the
power ON
B4/10914
**01 A4/LT•LG
**10 B5/ST
**11 A5/POST
0000 Initial value
Selected size
250mm
Platemaking range
(main-scanning direction)
Paper selecting specifica-
tions (inch)
Paper selecting specifica-
tions (A/B size)
(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment,
setting platemaking area (main-scanning direction)
q Access HELP mode H-42, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 276/303279
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-43 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy
2. Operation procedures
A B C D Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal (initial value)
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 00 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Light 1
Light 2Light 3
Light 3
Light 3
Light 3
Light 3
Dark 1
Dark 2
Dark 3
Dark 3
Dark 3
Dark 3
Dark 3
(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy
q Access HELP mode H-43, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For description of operation
\See page 67
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 277/303280
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-44 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking
2. Operation procedures
A B C D Resistance
0 0 0 0 3825-3908
0 0 0 1 3909-3993
0 0 1 0 3994-4077
0 0 1 1 4078-4162
0 1 0 0 4163-4246
0 1 0 1 4247-4330
0 1 1 0 4331-4415
0 1 1 1 4416-4499
1 0 0 0 4500-4583
1 0 0 1 4584-4668
1 0 1 0 4669-4752
1 0 1 1 4753-4837
1 1 0 0 4838-4921
1 1 0 1 4922-50051 1 1 0 5006-5090
1 1 1 1 5091-5175
(1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking
q Access HELP mode H-44, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For description of operation
\See page 67
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 278/303281
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-50 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of text mode document sensing darkness
2. Operation procedures
Display Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
1***
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
Lighter by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
Darker by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
(1) Setting of text mode document sensing darkness
q Access HELP mode H-50, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
For Standards / Adjustment
\See page 190
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-23 \See page 262
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Mode H-45, 46, 47, 48 and 49 are not used
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 279/303282
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-51 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemaking¡Use this to adjust the platemaking darkness for area q of
HELP mode H-30's test pattern 2.
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemaking
q Access HELP mode H-51, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-30 \See page 269
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Display Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
1***
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
*110
*111
Lighter by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
Darker by the set amount for the
lower 3 digits
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 280/303283
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-52, H-57 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
H-52
00**
11**
**0*
**1*
***1
***0
***1
***0
H-57
0***
0***
1***
1***
Item
I / F auto / manual
setting
DP-10
test pattern
Line scanning
speed
Setting
Manual
Auto(standard)
Standard
DP-10 test pattern only
1.6m sec / line
2.0m sec / line(standard)
3.2m sec / line
4.0m sec / line
0000 0000 Factory setting
(1) Setting of online conditions
¡ Use H-52 to set I/F switching (auto/manual) and online platemaking mode.
¡ Use H-57 to select data transmission speed (time for scanning of 1 line) for
online platemaking.
2. Operation procedures
¡H-52
(1) Setting of online conditions
q Access HELP mode H-52, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-16 \See page 256
HELP mode H-53 \See page 285
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 281/303284
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-52, H-57 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
¡H-57:Line scanning speed
rPress the STOP key.
tTo also select the data transmission speed (time for scanning of
1 line), carry out this step and the following 2 steps: Access HELP mode H-57, and press the PRINT key.
yUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a new 4-place binary
value. See the table inw above for 4-place binary values and the
corresponding settings.
iPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
uPress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorizedin the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 282/303285
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-53 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side)platemaking start position for online platemaking
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0***
Sign flag
Moves toward you by the set
amount of the lower 3 digits.
1***Moves backward by the set
amount of the lower 3 digits.
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
*100
*101
***1
*111
(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side)
platemaking start position for online platemaking
q Access HELP mode H-53, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Related HELP mode
HELP mode H-52,57 \See page 283
HELP mode H-16 \See page 256
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 283/303286
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-55 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting of ink check at printing start, cutting operationmode for master cutting, and interlocks
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Item Setting
0*** Ink check
1*** No ink check
*0** 1 stroke = one-way motion
*1** 1 stroke = reciprocating motion
**0* Activated
**1* Deactivated
***0
***1
0100
Setting of ink check, that
triggers ink replenishment if
no ink is detected at printing
start
Selection of cutter operation
mode
Interlock: emergency stop if
top cover or ejection box
open
Not used
Initial value
(1) Setting of ink check at printing start, cutting operation
mode for master cutting, and interlocks
q Access HELP mode H-55, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Mode H-54 is not used.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorizedin the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 284/303287
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-56 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
(1) Setting for selecting manipulation language
2. Operation procedures
ABCD Manipulation language
0000
0001
0010
0100
0011
0101
0110
Japanese
English
German
Italian
Spanish
French
(1) Setting for selecting manipulation language
q Access HELP mode H-56, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 285/303288
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-61 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
Display Item Setting
0 0 **
Selection of LC display spec-
ifications
Japanese: Duplo
0 1 ** Japanese: Other
1 0 ** English
1 1 ** Other foreign language
0 0 0 0 Factory setting
(1) Selection of LCD specification
2. Operation procedures
(1) Selection of LCD specification
q Access HELP mode H-61, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Mode H-57 (refer to H-52)Mode H-58, H-59, H-60 are not used
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 286/303289
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-64 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0*** Sign flag Tone setting
Tone adjusting
*000
Set amount
Standard (initial value : 000 0)
Maximum
*001
*010
*011
(1) Buzzer (tone) setting
2. Operation procedures
(1) Buzzer (tone) setting
q Access HELP mode H-64, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Mode H-62, H-63 are not used
Correction amount display
Sign flag
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 287/303290
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-66 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0*** C mode master feed out B mode
1***
*0** OFF
*1** ON
*10*
OFF
*11*
ON
***0
Not used
***1
0000 At shipment
Setting for master clump
opening/closing timing for
master attachment
Setting of paper feed sensor
(loop sensor) ON/OFF
Paper size mode
(long type)
master feed out C mode B mode
(1) Setting: clump opening/closing timing of when amaster is attached; paper feed sensor (loop sensor)
ON/OFF; Paper size mode (long type)
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting: clump opening/closing timing of when a
master is attached; paper feed sensor (loop sensor)ON/OFF; Paper size mode (long type)
q Access HELP mode H-66, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Mode H-65 is not used.
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 288/303291
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-67 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0001
Set amount
Larger the arching dimension
Smaller the arching dimension
0000
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1110
1111
(1) Setting of paper feed length
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting of paper feed length
q Access HELP mode H-67, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 289/303292
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-68 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0001
Set amount
Larger the paper feed timing
Smaller the paper feed timing
0000
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1110
1111
(1) Setting of paper feed timing
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting of paper feed timing
q Access HELP mode H-68, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 290/303293
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-69 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0000 DP-23S
DP-21S
0001 DP-21L
0011
Setting of model
(1) Setting of model
2. Operation procedures
(1) Setting of model
q Access HELP mode H-69, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 291/303294
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-70 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
0000 Normal
0001 KEYCARD COUNTER 4
(1) Option setting 1
2. Operation procedures
(1) Option setting 1
q Access HELP mode H-70, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Option setting 1
*Add a DIP switch to the battery board.
IMPORTANT :
Dip switch setting 1, 0, 0
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 292/303295
c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8
H-76 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode
1. Functions
ABCD Item Setting
Normal (initial value)
Slightly lighter
Slightly darker
Much darker
00**
01**
10**
11**
Setting
(1) Document darkness correction for text/photographmode
2. Operation procedures
(1) Document darkness correction for text/photograph
mode
q Access HELP mode H-76, and press the PRINT key.
For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.
wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for
the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place
binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.
\See page 235
rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will
reappear.
a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.
a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number
using the numeric keys.
¡During memorization:
1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1
Correction amount display
A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1
Mode H-71, H-72,H-73, H-74 and H-75 are not used
ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized
in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,
"SAVE" will be displayed.
Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 293/303296
MEMO
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 294/303297
Others
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions...........298
(1) Switch / Clutches .................................................298
(2) Sensors ..................................................................299
(3) Lamps / Motors .....................................................300
(4) PCB unit................................................................301
(5) Connector VR/LED Layout and Functions..........302
x Overall Wiring Layout................................................305
Chapter 9
9
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 295/303298
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions
(1) Switches/Clutches
23S0267
3
1
12
8
9
7
11
2
10
4
15
6
13
14
5
Paper ejection clutch DP-23S
Item No. Functions
Microswitch/switch
1
2
3
Opening and closing of the top cover is detected.
4
Whether the drum is set or not is detected.
5
Opening and closing of the front cover is detected.
6
7
ADF cover open/closed detection.
Whether the master ejection core is set or not and full or not is detected.
8
Push switch
15
10
12
JOG switch (drum rotator switch)
Elevator lower limit switch
9
11
13
Master feeding clutch
Master cover open/closed detection
14
ADF clutch B
ADF clutch A
Power switch
Clutch
Paper feed clutch
Paper/master feed elevator descent switch
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 296/303299
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
(2) Sensors
23S026819
17
16
18
12
1436
97
811 10 4
15
5 1 2
20
Master is detected at the inlet of the master ejection box.
Jam sensor photo-receiving Paper on the paper delivery side is detected.
Jam sensor photo-emitting Detection of paper on paper ejection side.
Item No. Functions
Microsensor
Photointerrupter
1
2
3 Master clump opening and closing lever A/C mode is detected.
Weather the document is placed or not is detected.
Document JAM is detected.
4 Master clump opening and closing lever B mode is detected.
5 Drum home position and JAM detection position are detected.
6 Master attachment/detachment position is detected.
7 Main motor encoder sensor.
8 Press rol ler ON and OFF is detected.9 Paper/master feed elevator top limit detection.
11 Center position of the print position adjustment is detected.
12 Weather the paper is placed or not is detected.
16
17
18
Master ejection sensor photo-emitting
Master ejection sensor photo-emitting
19
Photo-emitting of the master ejection and JAM detection sensor.
14 Leading edge of paper is detected.
15 Master position is detected.
Loop is detected.
10 Print position limit of the print position is detected.
13 LPU escape timing is detected. DP-23S
2013
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 297/303300
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
Item No. Functions
Lamp 1 Document lamp
Thermal head 2 Thermal head
Motor
3 Main motor
4 Paper feed tray elevator motor
6 Roll-up motor
7 Cutter motor
8 Print position adjusting motor
9 Ink pump motor
Scanner stepping motor
Fan motor Paper ejection fan
11
13
10
Plate making stepping motor
5 Master clump opening/closing lever motor
12 Guide roller drive motor DP-23S
(3) Lamps/Motors
23S0269
1
2
12
3
8
10
13
9
11
6
5
7
4
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 298/303301
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
Item No. Functions
CCD PCB unit 1 Reading the picture image.
2Inverter PCB unit
3
Lamp lights up.
Control panel PCB unit
4
Control panel key, display.
Ink detection PCB unit
5
Detecting Ink amount in the drum.
6
End mark sensor PCB unit
7
Detection of master presence on master feed travel path, and end mark.
Main PCB unit
8
Processing the image and controlling the machine on the whole.
Battery PCB unit
9
Keeping the total counter and HELP information.
Motor PCB unit
10
Controlling the main motor.
Drive PCB unit Driving the motor.
Regulated power supply Supplying with DC power supply.
11Mini drive PCB unit DP-23S Controlling the LPU (Long Paper Unit).
(4) PCB unit
23S0270
1
3
26
7
11
5
8
9
4
10
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 299/303302
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
(5) Connector VR/LED Layout and Functions
1) CCD PCB unit
2) Inverter PCB unit
3) Control Panel PCB unit
CCD C N
1
CN 2
C N
1
CN 1
4) Ink Detection PCB unit
VR 1CN 1
LEDVR / LED Function
VR
LED
* Adjusting the ink detection sensitivity.
Lights up when ink OK is detected.
* : Adjusted at the factory. Do not change.
IMPORTANT :
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 300/303303
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
C N
1
C N 1
( 3 2 P )
C N 2
( 3 0 P )
C N 1
1
C N 1
0
C N 3
( 2 4 P )
C N 9
C N 7
C N 8
C N 4
C N 5
CN 12
CN 14
u 35 u 5
u 26
u 25
SW 1
u 27
u 12
CN 13
CN 6
5) End Mark Sensor PCB unit
6) Main PCB unit
CN 1
CN 2
7) Battery PCB unit (EEPROM PCB)
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 301/303304
z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9
FUSE (125V 10A)
CN 4
CN 2
C N 1
C N 6
C N 3
CN 7
CN 9
C N 8
CN 5
Mini drive PCB unit DP-23S
9) Drive PCB unit
FUSE (250V 10A)
C N
1
C N
5
C N
4
C N
3
VR 1 VR 2
8) Main Motor PCB unit
C N
3
C N
2
C N
1
VR1
FUSE (125V 5A)
10) Regulated power supply
VR Function
VR 1
VR 2
Pre-stop speed adjustment.
JOG speed adjustment.
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 302/303
x Overall Wiring Layout
7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 303/303